Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

MELSEC-A - QnA Series Transition Examples - L08121ec

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 184

Programmable Controllers

MELSEC-A/QnA (Large), AnS/QnAS (Small)


Transition Examples

Sep. 2012 Edition


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these precautions before using this product.)

Before using products introduced in this publication, please read this Transition
Examples and relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle
the product correctly.
In this publication, the safety precautions are classified into two levels:
" WARNING" and " CAUTION".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,


WARNING resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,


CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead
to serious consequences.
Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety.

Make sure that the end users read this publication and keep it in a safe place for future reference.

1
[Design Precautions]

WARNING
● Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates
safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller. Failure to do
so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

(1) Configure external safety circuits, such as an emergency stop circuit, protection circuit, and protective
interlock circuit for forward/reverse operation or upper/lower limit positioning.

(2) The programmable controller stops its operation upon detection of the following status, and the output
status of the system will be as shown below.

Status Q Series module A/AnS Series module

Overcurrent or overvoltage protection


All outputs are turned off. All outputs are turned off.
of the power supply module is activated.

The CPU module detects an error such as All outputs are held or turned
a watchdog timer error by the self-diagnostic off according to the parameter All outputs are turned off.
function. setting.

All outputs may turn on when an error occurs in the part, such as I/O control part, where the CPU module
cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety mechanism or a
fail-safe circuit external to the programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit example, refer to Chapter 10
LOADING AND INSTALLATION in the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection).

(3) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module relay or transistor. Configure an
external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.

● In an output module, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load
short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety
circuit, such as a fuse.

● Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply.
If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or
malfunction.

● For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to relevant manuals for the
network.
Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.

2
[Design Precautions]

WARNING
● When changing data of the running programmable controller from a peripheral connected to the CPU
module or from a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module/special function module,
configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the entire system will always operate
safely.
For program modification and operating status change, read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the
safety before operation.
Especially, in the case of a control from an external device to a remote programmable controller, immediate
action cannot be taken for a problem on the programmable controller due to a communication failure.
Configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program, and determine corrective actions to be taken
between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.

CAUTION
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables.
Keep a distance of 100mm (3.94 inches) or more between them.
Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.

● When a device such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve is controlled through an output module, a large
current (approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on.
Take measures such as replacing the module with one having a sufficient current rating.

● The time for the CPU module to enter the RUN status after the CPU module is powered off and on or reset
will vary depending on the system configuration, parameter settings, and/or program size, etc.
Design the program so that the entire system will operate safely even if the time to reach the RUN status
varies.

3
[Installation Precautions]

CAUTION
● Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the QCPU
User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).
Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.

● To mount the module, while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module, fully
insert the module fixing projection(s) into the hole(s) in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into
place.
Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure or drop of the module.
When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module with a
screw.
Tighten the screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

● When using an extension cable, connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely.
Check the connection for looseness.
Poor contact may cause incorrect input or output.

● When using a memory card, fully insert it into the memory card slot.
Check that it is inserted completely.
Poor contact may cause malfunction.

● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the module.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in the
system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its
predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to the relevant sections in the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection) and in the manual for the corresponding module.

● Do not directly touch any conductive part of the module.


Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.

4
[Wiring Precautions]

WARNING
● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before starting installation or wiring.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product.

● After installing or wiring, attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

CAUTION
● Ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable
controller.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.

● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any spade
solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting in
failure.

● Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module, and connect the cables correctly.
Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure.

● Connectors for external connection must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer,
or must be correctly soldered.
Incomplete connections could result in short circuit, fire, or malfunction.

● Do not bundle the control cable or communication cable with the main circuit or power wire, or lay them
adjacently.
Separate these by 100 mm or more.
Failure to observe this could lead to malfunctioning caused by noise.

● Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.

● A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips, from
entering the module during wiring.
Do not remove the film during wiring.
Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation.

5
[Wiring Precautions]

CAUTION
● Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels.
Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal
block.
Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by maintenance personnel who is
familiar with protection against electric shock. (For wiring methods, refer to the QCPU User's Manual
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)).

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

WARNING
● Do not touch any terminal while power is on.
Doing so will cause electric shock.

● Correctly connect the battery connector.


Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before cleaning the module or retightening
the terminal screws or module fixing screws.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
Undertightening the terminal screws can cause short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

6
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

CAUTION
● Before performing online operations (especially, program modification, forced output, and operation status
change) for the running CPU module from the peripheral connected, read relevant manuals carefully and
ensure the safety.
Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.

● Do not disassemble or modify the modules.


Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire.

● Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handy-phone System)
more than 25cm (9.85 inches) away in all directions from the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction.

● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the module.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in the
system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its
predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to the relevant sections in the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection) and in the manual for the corresponding module.

● After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the module to/from the base unit, and the terminal
block to/from the module more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively.
Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.

● Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module.


Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it, dispose of it without using.

● Before handling the module, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human
body.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.

7
[Disposal Precautions]

CAUTION
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the QCPU User's Manual
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).)

[Transportation Precautions]

CAUTION
● When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations.
(For details of the regulated models, refer to the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection).)

8
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) Where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious
accident; and
ii) Where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the
PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.

(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries.
MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT
LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED
BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY
INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION
AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in
which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special
quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and
Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and
Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and
Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in
one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the
specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe,
redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For
details, please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region.

9
Revisions
Print Date Publication Number* Revision
Jul., 2008 L(NA)08121E-A First edition
Jan., 2011 L(NA)08121E-B Addition
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Replacement options
and module selection guide, Chapter 4, Section 7.3, Section 8.2,
Chapter 11, Chapter 12, Chapter 14, Chapter 15, Chapter 17,
Appendix 1, Appendix 2
Partial correction
Safety Precautions, Chapters were reorganized and contents were
revised(whole)
Sep., 2012 L(NA)08121E-C Addition
Section 1.2, Section 2.4, Section 4.3, Section 4.4, Chapter 5 (5),
Section 6.3
Change
Chapter 1 l Section 1.1, Chapter 4 (Title changed),
Chapter 6 (Title changed), Section 6.3 l Section 6.4

Partial correction
Safety Precautions, Introduction, Replacement options and module
selection guide
Chapter 3, Section 5.1, Section 5.2, Section 6.1, Section 10.1,
Chapter 14, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.6

* The publication number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

This publication confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any
patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving
industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this publication.

© 2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

10
Introduction
This publication describes case examples of transition from the large type MELSEC-A/QnA
Series, small type AnS/QnAS Series, A0J2(H) Series, and MELSECNET/MINI-S3 systems to
the MELSEC-Q Series.
Refer to these examples when considering system configurations and selecting modules during
a system upgrade.
This publication is intended to provide system configuration examples as a supplement to the
replacement handbooks. For specifications comparisons between A (large and small) and Q
Series or precautions for replacement, refer to the following replacement handbooks.

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals)


L(NA)08043ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals)


L(NA)08219ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Intelligent Function Modules)
L(NA)08046ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Intelligent Function Modules)
L(NA)08220ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Network Modules)
L(NA)08048ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Communication Modules)
L(NA)08050ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A0J2H Series to Q Series Handbook


L(NA)08060ENG

• Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3, A2C (I/O) to CC-Link Handbook


L(NA)08061ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to CC-Link/LT Handbook


L(NA)08062ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA Large Type Series to AnS/Q2AS Small Type Series Handbook
L(NA)08064ENG

• Transition of CPUs in MELSEC Redundant System Handbook (Transition from Q4ARCPU to QnPRHCPU)
L(NA)08117ENG

• Before using the products shown in the transition handbooks, catalogues, and transition examples, refer to
the relevant manuals and check the specifications, precautions, and restrictions.
For information on the products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., Mitsubishi
Electric System & Service Co., Ltd., and other companies, refer to the relevant catalogues and check the
specifications, precautions, and restrictions.
The manuals and catalogues for our products, products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering
Co., Ltd., and Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. are shown in Appendix of each transition
handbook.
• For details on product compliance with the above standards, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric
sales office or representative.
• Products shown in this handbook are subject to change without notice.

11
Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 9
Revisions ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 10
Introduction ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 11
Contents ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 12
Replacement options and module selection guide ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 14
Part Ⅰ : Hardware ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 17
1. Comparison of base mounting area ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 18
1.1 Comparison of A/QnA (Large Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 19
1.2 Comparison of AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 20
● Utilizing external wiring
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 22
 2.1 Replace 32-point terminal block type module using connector/terminal block converter module ‥‥‥ 22
 2.2 Replace 32-point contact output type module using relay terminal module ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 24
 2.3 Replace A/QnA (Large Type) Series 200 V AC input module AX21
  [Use FA goods (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)] ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 28
 2.4 Replace AnS/QnAA (Small Type) Series 200 V AC input module AX21
[Use FA goods (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)] ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 30
3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 32
 3.1 Upgrade to Q Series modules using Q Series large type base unit‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 36
 3.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) system using Q Series large type base unit ‥‥‥ 38
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)] ‥‥‥‥‥ 40
 4.1 Utilize A (Large Type) module replacement upgrade tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 40
 4.2 Compatibility of Q Series large type base unit with the upgrade tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 43
 4.3 Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module replacement upgrade tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 44
 4.4 Select the DC input module replacement module ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 47
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)] ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 50
 5.1 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 54
 5.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H remote I/O network system (using A0J2 renewal tool) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 58
 5.3 Replace MELSECNET/MINI compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link
(using A0J2 renewal tool) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 60
● Utilizing existing modules
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 62
 6.1 Use A/QnA (Large Type) Series QA6�B extension base unit ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 62
 6.2 Use QA conversion adapter module to utilize existing I/O modules and
extension base units with Q Series CPU (Use QA conversion adapter) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 64
 6.3 Use AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series QA1S6�B extension base unit ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 66
 6.4 Utilize existing A (Large Type) or AnS (Small Type) module without changing I/O addresses ‥‥‥‥‥ 69
● Replacing MELSECNET network system 
7. Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 72
 7.1 Replace A2CCPU with Q Series CPU and CC-Link (using A2C shape CC-Link I/O modules) ‥‥‥‥ 72
 7.2 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link (using wiring conversion adapter) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 74
 7.3 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) remote I/O station (building block type: AJ72PT35)
with MELSECNET/H using the existing external wiring ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 76
8. Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10 ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 80
 8.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) coaxial loop with MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system while
retaining existing A Series CPUs ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 80
 8.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H network system utilizing existing MELSECNET/B
twisted pair cable ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 82

12
9. Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 86
10. Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 92
 10.1 Replace A Series local station with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 92
 10.2 Replace A Series master station with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 94
● Using replacement dedicated modules  
11. Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 96
12. Replace DC input modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2, QX81-S2) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 102
● Using spare parts
13. Use AnS Series modules as spare parts for existing A Series modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 104
 13.1 Use AnS Series I/O modules as spare parts for large type A Series input/output modules ‥‥‥ 104
 13.2 Use AnS Series module as spare parts for large type A Series computer link module ‥‥‥‥‥‥ 106
Part Ⅱ : Programming ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 109
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 110
 14.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 111
14.1.1 Instructions that use accumulators (A0, A1) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 111
14.1.2 ASCII code conversion instruction "ASC" ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 115
 14.2 Replace AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 118
 14.3 Use index register as a 32-bit (2-word) device ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 122
15. Utilize SFC programs (replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 126
Part Ⅲ : Application ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 133
16. Replace AD75P/M with QD75P/D/M/MH while utilizing existing positioning  
parameters and data ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 134
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link  
refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 138
APPENDICES ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 149
Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network(MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H) ‥ 150
Appendix 1.1 System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H(PLC to PLC network) ‥‥ 150
Appendix 1.2 System configuration for existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) in combination with Q Series CPU ‥‥ 151
Appendix 1.3 System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H(remote I/O network) ‥‥‥ 151
Appendix 1.4 System configuration for redundant system network ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 152
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 154
Appendix 2.1 Q Series large base unit, Q Series large I/O modules, upgrade tool manufactured
by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 154
Appendix 2.2 Connector/terminal block converter module ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 157
Appendix 2.3 Replacement of MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) or A2CCPU with Q Series CPU and CC-Link ‥ 158
Appendix 2.4 A0J2 renewal tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. ‥‥‥ 159
Appendix 2.5 Other convenient modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 162
Appendix 2.6 QA extension base unit and QA conversion adapter ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 164
Appendix 2.7 A-A1S module conversion adapter ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 167
Appendix 2.8 MELSECNET(ΙΙ) Replacement ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 168
Appendix 2.9 A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 172
Appendix 2.10 Replacement of Q4AR redundant system with Q Series redundant system ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 173
Appendix 2.11 Technical support for replacing A/QnA Series with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 174
Appendix 2.12 Technical information for replacing A/QnA Series with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 176
Warranty ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 178

13
Replacement options and module selection guide
Specific modules are selected according to the transition procedure (gradually or simultaneously), module
configuration, and network configuration when replacing A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules.
The following shows module replacement options and references.

Module replacement

Options References
Replacing
A0J2HCPU
Examples: CHAPTER 5
To utilize existing Use A0J2 renewal tool
Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series
wiring manufactured by SC*1
using A0J2 renewal tool
Transition from MELSEC-A0J2H Series
To replace with Select Q Series I/O
to Q Series Handbook
Q Series I/O modules modules
(L-08060ENG)

To replace special
function modules with Select Q Series modules
Q Series modules

Modifying/Replacing
A Series modules
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA
To replace with AnS Select AnS Series (Large Type) Series to AnS/Q2AS
Series modules modules Small Type Series Handbook
(L-08064ENG)
To add modules Modify/Replace modules Examples: CHAPTER 13
to existing A Series using A-A1S module Use AnS Series modules as spare parts
system conversion adapter (A1ADP) for existing A Series modules

Replacing
A (Large Type) Series
with Q Series
To only replace the CPU Replace modules using QA Example: Section 6.1
module and continue using extension base unit and Utilize A/QnA (Large Type) Series QA6�B
existing A Series modules QA conversion adapter extension base unit
Example: Section 6.2
Utilize existing I/O modules and extension
base units to only replace the CPU with
Q Series CPU
(Use QA conversion adapter)

To replace A Series 32-point Replace modules using Examples: CHAPTER 3


terminal block type modules Q Series large type base unit Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large
without changing the wiring and I/O modules type base unit and I/O modules
configuration
Examples:Section 4.2
Replace modules using upgrade
Compatibility of Q Series large type
tool manufactured by MEE*2
base unit with the upgrade tool

To replace modules Replace modules using Examples: CHAPTER 2


when it is difficult to terminal block converter Install terminal block converter module
use the Q Series module and terminal module and terminal module externally
large type base unit

Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA


To replace all modules (Large Type)Series to Q Series
with Q Series modules Select Q Series modules Handbook(Fundamentals)
(L-08043ENG)

*1: SC: Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.


*2: MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

14
Options References
Replacing AnS
(Small Type) Series
with Q Series
To only replace the CPU Examples: Section 6.3
module and continue Replace modules using Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series
using the existing AnS QA1S extension base QA1S6�B extension base unit
(Small Type) module

To mount Q Series base Replace modules using


Examples: Section 4.3
unit using existing AnS AnS (Small Type) Series
Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module
(Small Type) base unit upgrade tool manufactured
replacement upgrade tool
mounting holes by MEE*2

To replace existing AnS


(Small Type) 16-point
terminal block module
without changing the
wiring configuration

To replace modules when Replace modules using FA 2.4 Replace AnS/QnAA (Small Type)
it is difficult to use the Q goods manufactured by Series 200 V AC input module AX21
Series large type base unit MEE*2 [Use FA goods (manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)]
To replace all modules Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS
Select Q Series modules
with Q Series modules (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook
(Fundamentals) (L(NA)08219ENG)

Network replacement

Replacing
MELSECNET/MINI
(S3) with CC-Link
Examples:Section 7.1
To replace networks using Replace network using A2C
Replace A2CCPU with Q Series CPU
existing external wiring shape I/O modules
and CC-Link
Examples:Section 7.2
Replace network using
To replace A2CCPU Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) I/O with
wiring conversion adapter
CC-Link using wiring conversion adapter

To replace networks Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3,


when it is difficult to
use existing wiring Select CC-Link modules A2C(I/O) to CC-Link Handbook
configuration (L-08061ENG)

Examples:Section 5.3
To replace
Use A0J2 renewal tool Replace MELSECNET/MINI compact type
compact type remote
manufactured by SC*1 remote I/O modules with CC-Link
I/O modules
using A0J2 renewal tool

To replace building Examples:Section 7.3


Replace with MELSECNET/H
block type remote Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) remote
remote I/O network
I/O modules I/O station with MELSECNET/H

*1: SC: Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.


*2: MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

15
Network replacement

Options References
Replacing
MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

To replace CPU modules Replace modules using Examples: CHAPTER 10


while retaining the existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station Replace one of A Series stations with
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) data link modules Q Series while maintaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

To replace with Examples:Section 8.1


Upgrade gradually to Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) coaxial loop
MELSECNET/10 using
Q Series CPU modules with MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system
existing cables
while retaining existing A Series CPUs
Transition to MELSECNET/H Examples:Section 8.2
using MELSECNET/B twisted Upgrade to MELSECNET/H network
pair cables system utilizing existing MELSECNET/B
twisted pair cable

To replace networks Replace networks using Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA


containing a remote MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC (Large Type)Series to Q Series
I/O station network and remote I/O network Handbook(Network Modules)
(L-08048ENG)
Change from remote I/O station Examples: CHAPTER 9
to normal station and replace Replace MELSECNET containing a remote
as one single network I/O station with MELSECNET/H

To gradually replace Use a gateway set to Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA


networks using existing configure networks with (Large Type)Series to Q Series
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) and relay stations Handbook(Network Modules)
MELSECNET/10
(L-08048ENG)

This section describes the main replacement options. If multiple options are selected or other options
are needed, comprehensive consideration is required to configure the system.

16
Part Ⅰ: Hardware

17
1. Comparison of base mounting area

1. Comparison of base mounting area


1.1 Comparison of A/QnA (Large Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area
When upgrading existing A/QnA systems, there are cases where the number of modules increases due to
specification differences. For instance, to replace an A/QnA Series 32-point terminal block type I/O module, two
Q Series 16-point terminal block type I/O modules are used. Despite increase in the number of I/O slots and
extension base stages, the Q Series footprint is smaller than that of the A/QnA Series.
The following example shows a comparison of the mounting areas when the A/QnA Series system is upgraded
to the Q Series.

Solution and Benefit


When replacing each 32-point terminal block type module with two 16-point terminal block type
modules, an additional extension base unit is required due to an increase in the number of modules.
However, the Q Series system fits inside the existing control panel because it is compact in size.

A. When the A35B main base unit and the A65B extension base unit are replaced
382
Q38B/Q68B
30
80 A35B 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1

98
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

40
250 30

Replace
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1

98
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

50 40
30
80 A65B 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

98
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

40
250 20 328 5

Downsized
50

352
Unit: mm

Q38B/Q68B

A35B
Base unit size comparsion
Tip
The A/QnA Series main base unit and extension base unit differ in size:
• A35B main base unit: 382 mm (W) x 250 mm (H)
• A65B extension base unit: 352 mm (W) x 250 mm (H)

Whereas the Q Series main base unit and extension base unit are the same size:
• Q38B main base unit/Q68B extension base unit: 328 mm (W) x 98 mm (H)

Even with the extra I/O slots and base units, the base unit installation area for Q Series is smaller than that for
A/QnA Series.

18
1. Comparison of base mounting area

B. When the A38B main base unit and the A68B extension base unit are replaced
480
Q312B/Q612B
30
80 A38B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

98
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B B
C C C C C C C C C
D D D D D D D D D
E E E E E E E E E
F F F F F F F F F

40
250 30
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Replace 98
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B B
C C C C C C C C C
D D D D D D D D D
E E E E E E E E E
F F F F F F F F F

50 40
30
80 A68B 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

98
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B B
C C C C C C C C C
D D D D D D D D D
E E E E E E E E E
F F F F F F F F F

40
250 20 439 5

Downsized
50

466
Unit: mm

Q312B/Q612B

A38B

Base unit size comparsion

Tip
The A/QnA Series main base unit and extension base unit differ in size:
• A38B main base unit: 480 mm (W) x 250 mm (H)
• A68B extension base unit: 466 mm (W) x 250 mm (H)

Whereas the Q Series main base unit and extension base unit are the same size:
• Q312B main base unit/Q612B extension base unit: 439 mm (W) x 98 mm (H)

Even with the extra I/O slots and base units, the base unit installation area for Q Series is smaller than that for
A/QnA Series.

19
1. Comparison of base mounting area

1.2 Comparison of QnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area
The Q Series is compact, and has a smaller mounting area.
It can be mounted within the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) mounting area.
The following example shows a comparison of the mounting areas when the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series
system is upgraded to the Q Series.

Solution and Benefit


Using the “AnS to Q Series conversion adapter” (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering
Co., Ltd.), the 16-point terminal block type module can fit into the existing space without changing
the wiring.

A. When the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series main base unit A1S35B and the A1S65B extension
base unit are replaced

325 328

30 A1S35B Q38B/Q68B 30

0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2

98
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6

130
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

40
30
Q35B/Q65B 30
30 A1S65B Replace
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2

98
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C

130
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

40

20 245 5
30

Unit: mm
315

Q38B Q312B
Q35B/Q65B Q38B/Q68B
/Q68B /Q612B

A1S35B A1S38B

Base unit size comparsion

20
1. Comparison of base mounting area

Existing base unit Replacement base unit


Remarks
Model Outline dimensions Model Outline dimensions

A1S35B 325(W)×130(H) Q35B 245(W)×98(H) Width is 80 mm narrower


Q38B 328(W)×98(H) Width is 3 mm wider

A1S38B 430(W)×130(H) Q38B 328(W)×98(H) Width is 102 mm narrower


Q312B 439(W)×98(H) Width is 9 mm wider

A1S65B 315(W)×130(H) Q65B 245(W)×98(H) Width is 70 mm narrower


Q68B 328(W)×98(H) Width is 13 mm wider

A1S68B 420(W)×130(H) Q68B 328(W)×98(H) Width is 92 mm narrower


Q612B 439(W)×98(H) Width is 19 mm wider

Tip
The AnS /QnA (Small Type) Series main base unit and extension base unit differ in size:
• A1S35B main base unit: 325 mm (W) x 130 mm (H)
• A1S65B extension base unit: 315 mm (W) x 130 mm (H)

Whereas the Q Series main base unit and extension base unit are the same size:
• Q38B main base unit/A68B extension base unit: 328 mm (W) x 98 mm (H)

The width will increase if the number of modules increases, i.e., A1S35B to Q68B will increase 3 mm, and
A1S38B to Q312B will increase by 9 mm.
However, this increase can be handled. Confirm the in-panel layout and space and determine whether the
extra modules can be mounted.

21
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally


2.1 Replace 32-point terminal block type module using connector/terminal block
converter module
Solution and Benefit
• The connector/terminal block converter module can support up to 2mm2 wires, allowing the use
of existing thick wires without modification.
• Using a connector/terminal block converter module, an existing 32-point terminal block type
module can be replaced with a 32-point connector type module without increasing the number of
modules.

The following is an example of replacing an A/QnA system that contains 32-point terminal block type input
modules (AX41).
A. Instructions
Replace AX41 with QX41 (32-point connector type module), and connect the connector/terminal block
converter module.
If QX40 (16-point terminal block type module) is used instead of QX41, two modules are required to replace
each AX41. Also, if existing wires are thicker than the applicable wire size (0.75 mm2), wiring modifications
may be necessary.

B. System configuration example


Current configuration New configuration
W=382mm W=328mm
Q01UCPU

QX41

QX41

QX41

QX41

QX42
Q61P

QY10

QY10

QY10
A2NCPU

H=98mm

(16)

(16)

(16)
A61P

AX41

AX41

AX41

AX41

AX42

H=250mm

Q38B
*1 *1
A35B X00... X20... X40... X60... X80...
W=352mm Replace *1 *1

W=328mm
A61P

AY13

AY13

AY13

AY13

AY13

H=250mm
Empty
Q61P

QY10

QY10

QY10

QY10

QY10

QY10

QY10

H=98mm
(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

A65B YC0... YE0... Y100... Y120... Y140... Q68B


*1: Connector/terminal block converter module (A6TBXY36)

C. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Power supply module A61P 2 Q61P 2
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q38B 1
Extension base unit A65B 1 Q68B 1
Extension cable AC06B 1 QC06B 1
Input module AX41 4 QX41 4
Connector/terminal block converter module N/A - A6TBXY36 4
Connector/terminal block converter module cable N/A - AC�TB 4
Input module AX42 1 QX42 1
Output module AY13 5 QY10 10

22
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

D. Connector/terminal block converter module


(1) External dimensions
Width
(All models have the same height and depth)
A6TBXY36 120 mm

D=52 mm
A6TBXY54 155 mm
A6TBX70 190 mm

W=120 mm
H=78.5 mm

A6TBXY36 (for 32 points)

(2) Specifications
Applicable
Model Outline Weight wire size Applicable crimping terminal Applicable model

A6TBXY36 For positive common input modules 0.4 kg Q Series: QX41, QX41-S1, QX42, QX42-S1, QY41P,
and sink output modules QY42P, QH42P, QX41Y41P
(standard type) AnS Series: A1SX41, A1SX41-S1, A1SX41-S2, A1SX42
A1SX42-S1, A1SX42-S2, A1SX82-S1
A1SY41, A1SY40P, A1SY42, A1SY42P, A1SY82,
A1SH42, A1SH42-S1
A6TBXY54 For positive common input modules 0.5 kg A Series: AX42, AX42-S1, AY42, AY42-S1, AY42-S3,
and sink output modules AY42-S4, AH42
(2-wire type) CC-Link: AJ65SBTCF1-32D, AJ65SBTCF1-32T,
AJ65BTC1-32D, AJ65BTC1-32T
1.25-3.5 (JIS) MELSECNET/MINI: AJ35TC1-32D, AJ35TC1-32T
A6TBX70 For positive common input modules 0.6 kg 1.25-YS3A (J.S.T.) Q Series: QX41, QX41-S1, QX42, QX42-S1, QH42P, QX41Y41P
(3-wire type) V1.25-M3 (J.S.T.) AnS Series: A1SX41, A1SX41-S1, A1SX41-S2, A1SX42,
A1SX42-S1, A1SX42-S2, A1SX82-S1
0.75 to V1.25-YS3A (J.S.T.)
A1SH42, A1SH42-S1
2 mm2 2-3.5 (JIS) A Series: AX42, AX42-S1, AH42
2-YS3A (J.S.T.) CC-Link: AJ65SBTCF1-32D, AJ65BTC1-32D
V2-S3 (J.S.T.) MELSECNET/MINI: AJ35TC1-32D
A6TBX36-E For negative common input modules 0.4 kg V2-YS3A (J.S.T.) Q Series: QX81
(standard type) AnS Series: A1SX81, A1SX81-S2
A6TBX54-E For negative common input modules 0.5 kg A Series: AX82
(2-wire type)
A6TBX70-E For negative common input modules 0.6 kg
(3-wire type)
A6TBY36-E For source output modules 0.4 kg Q Series: QY81P
(standard type) AnS Series: A1SY81
A6TBY54-E For source output modules 0.5 kg A Series: AY82EP
(2-wire type)

(3) Cables
Model Outline Weight Applicable model

AC05TB 0.5 m, for sink type modules 0.17 kg A6TBXY36

AC10TB 1 m, for sink type modules 0.23 kg A6TBXY54

A6TBX70
AC20TB 2 m, for sink type modules 0.37 kg

AC30TB 3 m, for sink type modules 0.51 kg

AC50TB 5 m, for sink type modules 0.76 kg

AC80TB 8 m, for sink type modules (common current: 0.5 A or lower) 1.2 kg

AC100TB 10 m, for sink type modules (common current: 0.5 A or lower) 1.5 kg

AC05TB-E 0.5 m, for source type modules 0.17 kg A6TBX36-E

AC10TB-E 1 m, for source type modules 0.23 kg A6TBY36-E

A6TBX54-E
AC20TB-E 2 m, for source type modules 0.37 kg
A6TBY54-E
AC30TB-E 3 m, for source type modules 0.51 kg
A6TBX70-E
AC50TB-E 5 m, for source type modules 0.76 kg

23
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

2.2 Replace 32-point contact output type module using relay terminal module

Solution and Benefit


• Using the relay terminal modules, a large type A Series 32-point contact output module can be
replaced while maintaining 8 points/common.
• A wide variety of compatible wire sizes are available using the relay terminal module.
A Series 32-point contact output module AY13: Max. 2 mm2
Relay terminal module: Max. 1.25 mm2
Q Series 16-point contact output module QY10: Max. 0.75 mm2
• Replacement is possible without the need of additional modules because a module mounted on
the base unit becomes compatible with 32-point connector type modules through the use of the
"connector/terminal block converter module".

The following is an example of replacing contact output modules (AY13) with transistor output modules (QY41P)
and externally converting transistor outputs into contact outputs.

A. Instructions
Replace AY13 with QY41P and connect the relay terminal modules to convert to contact outputs.
With this method, the system can be upgraded without increasing the number of modules on the base unit.
Also, 8 points/common, the same specification as that of the AY13, can be maintained.

B. System configuration example

Current configuration New configuration


Q01UCPU

QX41

QX41

QX41

QX41

QX42
Q61P
A2NCPU
A61P

AX41

AX41

AX41

AX41

AX42

A35B X00... X20... X40... X60... X80... Replace


QY41P

QY41P

QY41P

QY41P

QY41P
Q61P
A61P

AY13

AY13

AY13

AY13

AY13

A65B YC0... YE0... Y100... Y120... Y140...

QY41P

8 points/common
(the same specification
as that of AY13)

Dedicated cable
(AC�TE)

Reray terminal module Reray terminal module

16-point relay terminal module x 2


(A6TE2-16SRN)

24
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

C. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 2 Q61P 2
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q38B* 1
Extension base unit A65B 1 Q68B 1
Extension cable AC06B 1 QC06B 1
Input module AX41 4 QX41-S2 4
Connector/terminal block converter module N/A - A6TBXY36 4
Cable (for connector/terminal block converter module) N/A - AC�TB 4
Input module AX42 1 QX42 1
Output module AY13 5 QY41P 5
Relay terminal module N/A - A6TE2-16SRN 10
Cable (for relay terminal module) N/A - AC06TE 5
* The Q312 can be used if the control panel is wide enough. With the Q312, the I/O modules can be mounted on one base unit,
eliminating the need for the Q68B extension base unit, QC06B extension cable, and one Q61P power supply module.

D. Relay terminal module (A6TE2-16SRN)


(1) External dimensions Unit: mm

52.6

Note: The relay terminal module can function as a relay terminal block while performing contact outputs.

(2) Cables B-side: Second half


16 pts. (Y10 to Y1F)
m
L 0m
Model Length (L) 35

AC06TE 0.6 m
B
AC10TE 1m A

AC30TE 3m 35
0m
m
AC50TE 5m
A-side: First half
AC100TE 10 m 16 pts. (Y0 to YF)

25
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

(3) Specifications comparison between AY13 and A6TE-16SRN


○: Compatible, △: Partially changed
Compati-
Item AY13 A6TE2-16SRN Remarks
bility
Use two A6TE2-16SRN modules
Number of output points 32 points 16 points △ when using more than 16 points.

The isolation method differs, but the


Isolation method Photocoupler Relay △
isolation performance is equivalent.

Rated switching 24 V DC/2 A (resistive load)/point, 24 V DC/2 A (resistive load)/point,


240 V AC/2 A (cos Ф =1)/point, 240 V AC/2 A (cos Ф =1)/point, ○
voltage/current
5 A/common 8 A/common
Minimum switching load 5 V DC 1mA 5 V DC 1mA ○

Maximum switching 264 V AC 264 V AC



voltage 125 V DC 125 V DC

Response ON to OFF 10 ms or less 10 ms or less ○


time OFF to ON 12 ms or less 12 ms or less ○

Mechanical 20 million times or more 20 million times or more ○

Rated switching voltage/current Rated switching voltage/current



load: 200,000 times or more load: 100,000 times or more The electrical life of
Life 200 V AC 1.5 A, 240 V AC 1 A 200 V AC 1.5 A, 240 V AC 1 A the A6TE2-16SRN is half of
Electrical (cos Ф =0.7): 200,000 times or more (cos Ф ==0.7): 100,000 times or more the AY13's life. However, the relay
200 V AC 0.7 A, 240 V AC 0.5 A 200 V AC 0.7 A, 240 V AC 0.5 A for the A6TE2-16SRN can be

(cos Ф =0.35): 200,000 times or more (cos Ф ==0.35): 100,000 times or more
replaced.
24 V DC 1 A, 100 V DC 0.1 A 24 V DC 1 A, 100 V DC 0.1 A
(L/R=7 ms): 200,000 times or more (L/R=7 ms): 100,000 times or more

Maximum switching
3600 times/hour 3600 times/hour ○
frequency
8 points/common 8 points/common
Common terminal
(common terminals: (common terminals: ○
arrangement TB9, TB18, TB27, TB36) TB19, TB21)

Operation indicator ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) ○

24 V DC ±10% 24 V DC ±10%
Voltage ○
External Ripple voltage: 4 Vp-p or less Ripple voltage: 4 Vp-p or less
power
supply 290 mA 350 mA
Current ○
(TYP. 24 V DC, all points ON) (TYP. 24 V DC, all points ON)

38-point terminal block 38-point terminal block


External connections ○
connector (M3X6 screws) connector (M3X6 screws)

Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 mm2 0.75 to 1.25 mm2 △


Wiring modification is required.
R1.25-3, R1.25-MS,
Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, R1.25-B3A, R1.25-C3A,

terminal RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 RAV1.25-3, RAV1.25-MS3,
RAV1.25-B3A

26
MEMO

27
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

2.3 Replace A/QnA (Large Type) Series 200 V AC input module AX21
[Use FA goods (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)]
Solution and Benefit
• Use the Q Series large type input module QX21L to replace the modules without changing the
wiring.
Note that if the Q Series large type base unit cannot be used because of space limitations in the
panel or because of the module configuration, etc., replacements can be completed easily by
using the FA goods.
• A dedicated cable is available to connect the programmable controller with the FA goods, so
there’s no need to prepare cables when making a replacement.

FA goods
A variety of FA goods, including a terminal block connector conversion module, I/O type converter (AC input ->
DC input conversion, DC output signal -> relay output conversion, etc.), are available. Use these convenient
products as relays, signal conversions and a means to reduce wiring when compatible modules are not available
for replacing from the A/QnA (large) Series to the Q Series.

The following is an example of replacing the A (large) I/O module with the Q Series using FA goods.
A. Replacement conditions
(1) Using the FA goods, convert the 200 V AC input into 24 V DC, and lead it in with QX41, etc.
(2) The external wiring will change, but program does not need to be changed since the I/O address is the same.
(3) The following FA goods are used.
Product name Model External connection Remarks
(1) 200 V AC input module insulated with
photo coupler
FA-TH16X200A31L
(2) Input module on programmable controller side
200 V AC photo
16-point/common QX41, QX42, QH42 and QX41Y41P
coupler insulated
2-wire type (3) CC-Link module
input module
AJ65SBTCF1-32D
(4) Connection cable
FA-CBL���FM2V and FA-CBL���FM2LV

B. Example of replacement from current configuration


Current configuration Configuration diagram after replacement

AX21 AX21 QX41 QX41


(1) (2) I/O I/O I/O
(1) (2) I/O I/O I/O Q61P Q01U
A61P A2N module module module Replace CPU module module module
CPU
32points 32points
X000~ X020~ Q35B
A35B (200 V AC 32-point input for AX21)
FA-TH16X200A31L FA-TH16X200A31L
FA-TH16X200A31L FA-TH16X200A31L

C. Application (CC-Link input module) 200 V AC input

AJ65SBTCF1-32D
FA-TH16X200A31L
200 V AC input
FA-TH16X200A31L

CC-Link FA-CBL06FM2LV
other stations
28
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

D. Connection cable
Shape Model Cable length
FA-CBL06FM2LV 0.6m
FA-CBL10FM2LV 1.0m
FA-CBL20FM2LV 2.0m
FA-CBL30FM2LV 3.0m
FA-CBL50FM2LV 5.0m
FA-CBL100FM2LV 10.0m

E. Module external dimensions


175
2-φ8
10 155 10
2-φ4.5 26.9
4.75

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E

27.5
FA-TH16X100A31
AC100V Input module
59.5

71.5

35.5

ck

12
lo
e
pl
m
Si
5
7.26

53.4

8.5
7.62 12
DIN rail
Unit: mm

F. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35B 1
Input module AX21 2 QX41 or QX42 2/1
FA goods : Input module − − FA-TH16X200A31L 4
FA-CBL��FM2V
Connection cable − − 2
FA-CBL���FM2LV

Tip
• The FA goods input module has a function to convert 200 V AC input signal into 24 V DC, so select a 24 V
DC input connector type module for the programmable controller side input module.
• The following products are available for the FA goods.
Triac large capacity (1 A/point) output module
Transistor large capacity (2 A/point) output module
Common multi-point I/O module
The FA goods can be used when replacement using the Q Series large type I/O module conversion adapter
is difficult.
For details on the FA goods manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., please contact your
local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.
• To replace using existing external wiring terminal block, use the Q Series large type input module QX21L.
Refer to “3. Replacing with the Q Series large type base unit” for details.

29
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

2.4 Replace AnS/QnAA (Small Type) Series 200 V AC input module AX21
[Use FA goods (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)]

Solution and Benefit


• An increase in modules and changes to address can be handled easily by using FA goods.
• A dedicated cable is available to connect the programmable controller with the FA goods, so
there’s no need to prepare cables when making a replacement.

The following is an example of replacing the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) I/O module with the Q Series using FA
goods.
When replacing the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) 200 V AC input module A1SX20 (16-input points, 16 occupied
points), the Q Series 200 V AC input module is QX28 (8-point input, 8-occupied points), so the number of
modules will increase, and the address will change.
By using the FA goods, the modules can be replaced without increasing the number of modules or changing
the address.

A. Replacement conditions
(1) Using the FA goods, convert the 200 V AC input into 24 V DC, and lead it in with QX40.
(2) The external wiring will change, but program does not need to be changed since the I/O address is
the same.
(3) The following FA goods are used.
Product name Model External connection Remarks

FA-TH16X200A31L (1) 200 V AC input module insulated with


200 V AC photo photo coupler
16-point/common
coupler insulated (2) Input module QX40 on programmable
2-wire type
input module controller side
(3) Connection cable FA-CBL���TMV20

B. Example of replacement from current configuration

Current configuration Configuration diagram after replacement

QX40QX40 I/O I/O I/O


A1S A2SH A1S A1S I/O I/O I/O Q61P Q01U
CPU modulemodulemodule
61PN CPU X20 X20 module module module Replace
Q35B
A1S35B
FA-CBL06TMV20 FA-CBL06TMV20

FA-TH16X200A31L FA-TH16X200A31L

200 V AC input

30
2. Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

C. Connection cable
Shape Model Cable length
FA-CBL06TMV20 0.6m
FA-CBL10TMV20 1.0m
FA-CBL20TMV20 2.0m
FA-CBL30TMV20 3.0m
FA-CBL50TMV20 5.0m
FA-CBL100TMV20 10.0m

D. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A1S61PN 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2SHCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A1S35B 1 Q35B 1
Input module A1SX20 2 QX40 2
FA goods − − FA-TH16X20031L 2
Connection cable − − FA-CBL���TMV20 2

Tip
• The FA goods input module has a function to convert the 200 V AC input signal into 24 V DC. When
replacing a 16-point terminal block type, select a 24 V DC input terminal block type module for the
programmable controller side input module. In addition, select a cable that matches the module type.
• The following products are available for the FA goods.
Triac large capacity (1 A/point) output module
Transistor large capacity (2 A/point) output module
Common multi-point I/O module
The FA goods can be used when replacement using a conversion adapter is difficult.
For details on the FA goods manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., please contact your
local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.

31
3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules
Solution and Benefit
• The Q Series large type I/O modules allow the use of existing A/QnA Series 32-point I/O wiring,
eliminating the need for rewiring.
• Performance specifications of the Q Series large type I/O modules are equivalent to those of the
A/QnA Series.
• The hole size and pitch of the Q Series large type base units are the same as those of the A/QnA
Series, eliminating the need of making new mounting holes.
• The Q Series large type I/O modules and standard Q Series modules can be mounted together on
the Q Series large type base unit. For the standard Q Series modules, existing A/QnA Series
connectors or terminal blocks can be utilized without modification by using a conversion adapter
(upgrade tool) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

A. Q Series large type base unit and Q Series large type I/O module
Wired terminal blocks of the existing A Series I/O modules can be mounted directly without modifying the
external wiring.

Q Series large type


base unit Q Series large type
I/O module

Direct mount

Remove the wired


terminal block
from the existing
I/O module

Upgrade tool (Conversion adapter)


manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.

Mount directly

Mount a standard Q Series


power supply module and
CPU module Q Series large type
I/O module Remove the wired
terminal block
Q Series module from the existing
I/O module

Q Series module

Q Series large type blank cover (QG69L)


(To mount a standard Q Series module
on a large type base unit)

B. Q Series large type base unit options


Product name Model Outline
Q38BL 8 slots, 1 power supply module required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable
Main base unit
Q35BL 5 slots, 1 power supply module required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable
Q68BL 8 slots, 1 power supply module required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable
Extension base
Q65BL 5 slots, 1 power supply module required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable
unit
Q55BL 5 slots, power supply module not required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable

32
3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

C. Q Series large type I/O module options


Model
Product name Existing A Series Q Series Outline
module module
32 points, 100 to 120 V AC, rated input current:10 mA (100 V AC, 60 Hz),
AX11 QX11L response time: 15 ms or less (OFF to ON), 25 ms or less (ON to OFF),
32 points/common, 38-point terminal block
Input module
32 points, 200 to 240 V AC, rated input current: 10 mA (220 VAC 60 Hz),
AX21 QX21L response time: 15 ms or less (OFF to ON), 25 ms or less (ON to OFF),
32 points/common, 38-point terminal block
AY10A
16-point contact output, 24 V DC/240 V AC, 2 A/point, 16 A/all points,
QY11AL All points independent common, 38-point terminal block,
AY11A Surge suppressor (Varistor 387 to 473 V)
Output module 32-point contact output, 24 V DC/240 V AC, 2 A/point, 5 A/common,
AY13 QY13L
8 points/common, 38-point terminal block
AY23 QY23L
32-point triac output, 100 to 240 V AC, 0.6 A/point, 2.4 A/common,
8 points/common, 38-point terminal block
32-point transistor output 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A/point, 4 A/common,
AY51 16-point/common protection function (overheat protection function,
QY51PL
AY51-S1 overload protection function), 38-point terminal block
Large type Blank cover for mounting existing Q Series module on the Q Series large
N/A QG69L
blank cover type base unit

D. Conversion adapter (upgrade tool) options [manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.]
Model External connections
Product name
Existing A Series module Q Series module Conversion adapter (Q Series)
AX10 QX10 ERNT-AQTX10
QX40
AX40
QX40-S1 Terminal block
ERNT-AQTX40
AX70 QX70 (18 points)
AX50, AX50-S1 QX50
Input module AX80 QX80 ERNT-AQTX80
AX41
QX41, QX41-S2
AX31-S1 FCN connector
ERNT-AQTX41
AX41-S1 QX41-S1 (40P plug)
AX71 QX71
AX81, AX81-S1 QX81, QX81-S2 ERNT-AQTX81 D-Sub connector (37P)
AY10
AY11
QY10 ERNT-AQTY10
AY11E
AY11EEU
Terminal block
AY22 QY22 ERNT-AQTY22
(18 points)
Output module AY40, AY40P QY40P
ERNT-AQTY40
AY70 QY70
AY50 QY50 ERNT-AQTY50
AY80 QY80 ERNT-AQTY80
AY41, AY41P QY41P FCN connector
ERNT-AQTY41
AY71 QY71 (40P plug)
AY81, AY81EP QY81P ERNT-AQTY81 D-Sub connector (37P)
A68AD*
Analog input A68AD-S2*
Q68ADV
ERNT-AQT68AD
module Q68ADI
A68ADN* Terminal block
A62DA, A62DA-S1 Q62DAN ERNT-AQT62DA (18 points)
Analog output A68DAV Q68DAVN
module ERNT-AQT68DA
A68DAI, A68DAI-S1 Q68DAIN
QD62
High-speed counter AD61 FCN connector
QD62-H01 ERNT-AQTD61
module (40P)
AD61-S1 QD62-H02
* Voltage input or current input is applicable to replacement Q Series modules.
If the existing A Series module uses a combination of voltage and current input, it cannot be replaced using a Q Series large type base
unit and a conversion adapter.
Consider using a conversion adapter (2-slot type) to replace the module with a Q64AD-GH (2 slots required).

33
3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

Tip
• Existing A Series wiring harness plugs in without modification.
• The Q Series large type base units and I/O modules are compatible with High Performance Model QCPUs,
Universal model QCPU (except Q00UJCPU), and MELSECNET/H Remote I/O Stations. Basic Model
QCPUs, Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs, and Safety CPU are not compatible.
• Neither Q Series large type main base unit nor Q Series large type extension base unit can be used in a
multiple CPU system.
• The standard Q Series modules can be mounted on the Q Series large type base unit using the Q Series
large type blank cover.
• The Q Series large type base units can be used together with the standard Q Series base units.
(e.g., main base unit: Q312B, extension base unit: Q68BL)
• Some modules, such as modules that occupy two slots, cannot be mounted. Refer to “Q Series Large Type
Base Unit/I/O Module/Blank Cover User’s Manual” for details.
• After replacing the existing connector with the wiring intact, the 64-point connector type I/O module can be
used for the Q Series I/O module.
A blank cover is required to mount the Q Series large type base unit.
Note that the connector layout changes from top/bottom to left/right, so the position of the lower connector
moves to the upper side.
Check that the existing wiring is long enough.
• The 8-slot no power supply required type is not available for the Q Series extension base unit.
When replacing the existing extension base unit to the 8-slot no power supply required type A58B, replace
with the power mounted type Q68BL.
In this case, the mounting width dimensions will increase by 55 mm (411 mm to 466 mm).
Confirm the mounting space, and that the wiring is long enough to move to the mounting position.
• 2-slot type conversion adapters of the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
cannot be used.
• For details on the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., please contact
your local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.

34
MEMO

35
3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

3.1 Upgrade to Q Series modules using Q Series large type base unit

Solution and Benefit


• Unlike the QA6�B extension base unit, which is used to directly mount existing A Series I/O
modules for a gradual upgrade, the Q Series large type base unit, I/O module, and conversion
adapter (upgrade tool) enables all modules to be upgraded to the Q Series at once and allows use
of existing A Series wiring.
• Having the same slot width as A Series base units, the Q Series large type base units permit
direct mount of existing 32-point I/O wiring on the Q Series I/O modules. This can shorten the
upgrade time.
• Performance specifications of the Q Series large type I/O modules are equivalent to those of the A
Series, eliminating concerns about compatibility with the connected external devices.

The following is an example of upgrading an A Series system to the Q Series using the Q Series large type base
units, I/O modules, and conversion adapters.
A. Instructions
(1) Replace the existing 32-point terminal block type I/O modules with Q Series large base units and I/O
modules, and use the same terminal blocks to connect with external wiring.
(2) If there is no compatible Q Series large type I/O module, use the conversion adapter to replace the existing
module with standard Q Series I/O module.
B. System configuration example

Current configuration New configuration


Q01UCPU

Existing terminal block QX11L

Existing terminal block QX11L

Existing terminal block QX11L

Existing terminal block QX11L

Existing terminal block QX11L


Q61P
A2NCPU
A61P

AX11

AX11

AX11

AX11

AX11

Q35BL
A35B
Replace
QC06B
AC06B

QX41 QY41P
QY13L

QY13L

QY23L
Existing terminal block ERNT-AQTX41

Existing terminal block ERNT-AQTY41


Q61P
AX41
A61P

AY41

AY13

AY13

AY23

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Q65BL
A65B
* Conversion adapters (upgrade tool)
manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd. are used.

36
3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

C. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
Extension base unit A65B 1 Q65BL 1
Power supply module A61P 2 Q61P 2
Extension cable AC06B 1 QC06B 1
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
AX11 5 QX11L 5
QX41 1
Input module
AX41 1 ERNT-AQTX41
1
(conversion adapter)
AY13 2 QY13L 2
AY23 1 QY23L 1
Output module
QY41P 1
AY41 1 ERNT-AQTY41
1
(conversion adapter)
Q Series large type blank cover N/A - QG69L 2

Tip
• The Q Series power supply and CPU modules can be mounted without a Q Series large type blank cover.
• A blank cover is required to mount the standard Q Series I/O modules including the ones used with a
conversion adapter.
• When the Q Series large type base unit is used, the depth is greater than that of the A Series.

A Series 32-point Q Series I/O module


I/O module Q Series large type I/O module

Conversion adapter
(upgrade tool)
manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.

115 25 129 25

140 154 165.3*

Unit: mm
* The depth of ERNT-AQT68DA is 176.2 mm.

37
3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

3.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) system using Q Series large type
base unit
Solution and Benefit
• With the Q Series large type base units and I/O modules, an existing MELSECNET remote I/O
network system can be upgraded to a MELSECNET/H remote I/O network system by utilizing
existing wiring. Just remount the existing wired terminal block on the Q Series large type I/O
modules. The upgrade time can be greatly reduced.
• In addition to the Q Series large type I/O modules, the conversion adapter (upgrade tool) can also
be used to further minimize upgrade process.
* For the model names of conversion adapters used as upgrade tools, refer to "Conversion adapter (upgrade tool) options
[manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.]" in page 27.

The following is an example of upgrading a MELSECNET network system consisting of only remote I/O stations
to a MELSECNET/H remote I/O network system using the Q Series large type base units, I/O modules, and
conversion adapters.
A. Instructions
Use Q Series large type base units, I/O modules, and conversion adapters to replace the existing
MELSECNET remote I/O network system.

B. System configuration example


Q Series
Current configuration New configuration large type blank
cover
Master station Remote master station
Q02UCPU

QJ71LP21-25
A2ACPUP21

QX11L

QX11L

QY13L

QY23L
Q61P
Empty
A61P

AX11

AX11

AY13

AY23

terminal block

terminal block

terminal block

terminal block
A35B
Existing

Existing

Existing

Existing
MELSECNET (optical loop)

Remote I/O station 1 Q35BL

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network (optical loop)


AJ72P25
A61P

AX41
AX11

AY13

AY23

AY41

Remote I/O station 1


* *
QX41 QY41P
QJ72LP25-25

Replace
terminal block ERNT-AQTX41

terminal block ERNT-AQTY41


Q61P

QX11L

QY13L

QY23L

A35B
terminal block

terminal block

terminal block

Remote I/O station 2


Existing

Existing

Existing

Existing

Existing
AJ72P25
A61P

AX40
AX11

AY13

AY10

AY40

Q35BL

Remote I/O station 2


* * *
QX40 QY10 QY40P
QJ72LP25-25

A35B
terminal block ERNT-AQTX40

terminal block ERNT-AQTY10

terminal block ERNT-AQTY40


Q61P

QX11L

QY13L
terminal block

terminal block
Existing

Existing

Existing

Existing

Existing

Q35BL

* Q Series large type blank cover (QG69L) is required when using a Q Series module.

38
3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

C. Module selection example


(1) Master station to remote master station
Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2ACPUP21 1 Q02UCPU 1
Network module N/A - QJ71LP21-25 1
Q Series large type blank cover N/A - QG69L 1
Input module AX11 2 QX11L 2
AY13 1 QY13L 1
Output module
AY23 1 QY23L 1

(2) Remote I/O station 1


Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
Network module AJ72P25 1 QJ72LP25-25 1
Input module AX11 1 QX11L 1
AY13 1 QY13L 1
Output module
AY23 1 QY23L 1
QX41 1
Input module AX41 1
ERNT-AQTX41 (conversion adapter) 1
QY41P 1
Output module AY41 1
ERNT-AQTY41 (conversion adapter) 1
Q Series large type blank cover N/A - QG69L 2

(3) Remote I/O station 2


Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
Network module AJ72P25 1 QJ72LP25-25 1
AX11 1 QX11L 1
Input module QX40 1
AX40 1
ERNT-AQTX40 (conversion adapter) 1
AY13 1 QY13L 1
QY10 1
AY10 1
Output module ERNT-AQTY10 (conversion adapter) 1
QY40P 1
AY40 1
ERNT-AQTY40 (conversion adapter) 1
Q Series large type blank cover N/A - QG69L 3

Tip
• When utilizing existing optical fiber cables, note that the minimum distance between stations may be limited
to 200m depending on the type of cables used. Refer to “Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System
Reference (Remote I/O network)” SH-080124 for details.
If the distance between stations is less than 200m, the existing optical fiber cables can be utilized without
restrictions.
• When replacing the existing ACPU to a CPU with link function, an empty slot is required to mount the network module.
If no empty slot is available, the extension base unit must be added or the base unit must be changed to one
with more slots.

39
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool


(manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

4.1 Upgrade tool configuration and model list

Solution and Benefit


• When replacing the existing A Series modules, there may be cases in which two replacement
modules are needed depending on the specification of the Q Series modules. In such cases, the
terminal blocks of the A Series modules do not need to be replaced and can be used through the
upgrade tool (base adapter and conversion adapter (2-slot type)) manufactured by Mitsubishi
Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. Thus, wiring time is greatly reduced.
• The base adapter (upgrade tool) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. is
compatible with the 12-slot main/extension base unit, enabling the expansion of slot numbers if
needed.

Upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.


The upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. consists of: base adapter,
conversion adapter, and conversion adapter fixing mount.
For inquiries, please contact your local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.
• Base adapter
An adapter to mount a Q Series base unit using installation holes of the existing A Series large type base
unit.
• Conversion adapter
An adapter to mount an existing A Series module terminal block on the replacement Q Series I/O modules,
analog modules, or high speed counter modules. (The existing terminal blocks and wires are utilized.)
There are two types of conversion adapters: 1-slot type and 2-slot type.
• Conversion adapter fixing mount
A mount to fix the conversion adapters.

Q Series main base unit / extension base unit

Base adapter

Q Series I/O module

Conversion adapter fixing mount

Conversion adapter (2-slot type)

Terminal block removed from the existing A Series I/O module

Conversion adapter (1-slot type)

40
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

A. Conversion adapter
(1) 1-slot type (Mountable to Q Series large type base unit)
Separate adapters for I/O modules, analog modules, and high speed modules are available respectively.
The 1-slot type adapter can be mounted to Q Series large type base unit. For module options, refer to
chapter 3, " Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules".
(2) 2-slot type (Not mountable to Q Series large type base unit)
(a) For I/O module
Conversion adapter (2-slot type)
Input/Output MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series Shape
module model module model Model
MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series
AX11*1
Input QX10 x 2 modules ERNT-AQTX11
AX11EU*1
AY10A*2
AY11A*2 QY18A x 2 modules ERNT-AQTY10A
AY11AEU*2
AY13*3 Terminal block
Terminal block
AY13E*3 QY10 x 2 modules ERNT-AQTY13 (18-points)
(38-points)
Output AY13EU*3 x 2 modules
AY23*4 QY22 x 2 modules ERNT-AQTY23
AY51*5
QY50 x 2 modules
AY51-S1*5
ERNT-AQTY51
AY81*6
QY80 x 2 modules
AY81EP*6

*1: Replaceable with Q Series large type input module QX11L.


*2: Replaceable with Q Series large type output module QY11AL.
*3: Replaceable with Q Series large type output module QY13L.
*4: Replaceable with Q Series large type output module QY23L.
*5: Replaceable with Q Series large type output module QY51PL.
*6: Replaceable with one slot when Q Series output module QY81P is selected and conversion adapter ERNT-AQTY81 is used.
(Q Series large type base unit mountable)

(b) For analog module


Conversion adapter (2-slot type)
Input/Output MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series Shape
module model module model Model
MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series
A68AD
(Voltage/Current mixed input)
A68AD-S2
Q64AD-GH x 2 modules* ERNT-AQT68AD-GH
(Voltage/Current mixed input)
Input A68ADN
Terminal block
(Voltage/Current mixed input) Terminal block (18-points)
A616AD (38-points) x 2 modules
(Voltage input) Q68ADV x 2 modules
ERNT-AQT616AD
A616AD
(Current input) Q68ADI x 2 modules
A616DAV Q68DAVN x 2 modules
Output ERNT-AQT616DA
A616DAI Q68DAIN x 2 modules
* When using mixed voltage/current input for existing A Series module.
The 1-slot type conversion adapter can be used when using voltage input only or current input only.

41
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

B. Base adapter
An adapter to mount a Q Series base unit using installation holes of the existing A Series large type base unit.
MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series Mountable conversion adapter fixing mount
module model module model Base adapter model
ERTN-AQF12 ERTN-AQF8 ERTN-AQF5 ERTN-AQF3
Q312B、Q312DB ERNT-AQB38 ○ ○
A38B、A38HB
Q38B、Q38DB ERNT-AQB38 ○
Q612B ERNT-AQB68 ○ ○
A68B
Q68B ERNT-AQB68 ○
A58B Q68B ERNT-AQB58 ○
Q38B、Q38DB ERNT-AQB35 ○ ○
A35B
Q35B ERNT-AQB35 ○
Q68B ERNT-AQB65 ○ ○
A65B
Q65B、Q55B ERNT-AQB65 ○
A55B Q65B、Q55B ERNT-AQB55 ○
A32B Q33B ERNT-AQB32 ○
A62B Q63B、Q52B ERNT-AQB62 ○
A52B Q52B ERNT-AQB52 ○

C. Conversion adapter fixing mount


A mount to fix the conversion adapters.
Conversion adapter fixing mount model Description Remarks
ERNT-AQF12 12-slot conversion adapter fixing mount
ERNT-AQF8 8-slot conversion adapter fixing mount A conversion adapter fixing mount is
ERNT-AQF5 5-slot conversion adapter fixing mount required to mount conversion adapters.
ERNT-AQF3 3-slot conversion adapter fixing mount

Tip
• Tips for using the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
(a) The programmable controller side modules are Q Series modules.
The specifications and functions may be different from those of the A Series modules. Refer to the
specification comparison in the corresponding module's transition handbook to confirm compliance with
the specifications and functions of the external device.
(b) Q Series main/extension base unit can be used with Q Series large type base unit. Select a base unit
according to the module configuration after replacement.
(Example of base unit combination)
• Main base unit: Q312B (Q Series standard type)
(Upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. is used.)
• Extension base unit: Q68BL (Q Series large type base unit)
Note that only the following CPU types can be used with Q Series large type base unit.
High Performance Model QCPU
Universal Model QCPU (except for Q00JCPU)
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station
(There are no restrictions on the CPU type if only the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi
Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. is used.)
• The 1-slot type conversion adapter may be difficult to mount depending on the existing wire size. In such
cases, consider using a Q Series large base unit.

42
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

4.2 Compatibility of Q Series large type base unit with the upgrade tool
The following table shows the compatibility of Q Series large type base unit with the upgrade tool manufactured
by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. when replacing existing A Series modules with Q Series modules.
Base adapter
Item Q Series large type base unit*1
・Conversion adapter (Upgrade tool)*2
Same width as the Same width as Q Series base unit
Slot width of base unit*3 A Series base unit (37.5 mm) (27.4 mm)
Power supply module Q Series standard power supply module ○ ○
Basic model QCPU × ○
High Performance model QCPU ○ ○
CPU module
Mountable Process CPU × ○
module Universal model QCPU ○*4 ○
Q Series large type I/O modules*5 ○ ×
• I/O module
• Intelligent function Q Series module (occupies 1 slot) ○*7 ○
module Q Series module (occupies 2 slots) × ○
For terminal block type 16-point I/O module (occupies 1 slot) ○*7 ○
For terminal block type 32-point I/O module (occupies 1 slot) ○*7 △*9
Conversion For terminal block type 32-point I/O module (occupies 2 slots) × △*10
adapter*6 For high-speed counter module ○*7 △*9
For analog module (occupies 1 slot) ○ *7
△*9
For analog module (occupies 2 slots) × △*10
Connection of QA/QA1S extension base unit* 8
○ ○

○: Applicable (Mountable) △: Applicable with restrictions (Mountable) ×: Not Applicable (Not mountable)
*1: Q Series large type base units can be used with Q Series base units (standard products).
*2: Mount a Q Series base unit (standard product) on the base adapter manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.
MELSEC-A Series module MELSEC-Q Series module
*3: Check mounting conditions before using the
upgrade tool, because wiring space is
reduced due to a decrease in the module's
width. 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 0
8 1
9 2
A 3

*4: Q00UJCPU is not compatible.


4
B 5
C 6
D 7
E 8
F 9
A
B

*5: Number of common points and electrical specifications are


C
D
E
F

same as that of large type A Series I/O module.


*6: Since the adapters are mounted on Q Series modules,
the specifications and functions are same as those of the
Q Series modules. (Please check the transition 37.5 27.4
handbook, since the specifications and functions are
different from those of large type A Series module)
*7: Q Series large type blank cover (QG69L) is required.
*8: Only High Performance Model QCPUs can be connected to
the QA/QA1S extension base unit. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
*9: If the size of the wire connected to the terminal block is larger
than 1.25mm2, ERNT-AQTX41, AQTY41, AQTX81, AQTY81,
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6

AQT68AD, AQT68ADN, AQT68DA, and AQTD61 modules may


7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E

be difficult to mount.
F F F F F

In this case, secure wiring space by leaving empty slots in


between modules. For example, mount modules on slot No. 0, 2,
4, 6, 8, and leave slot No. 1, 3, 5, 7 empty. If the number of slots
is insufficient, consider using the Q Series large type base unit.
*10: To be used when replacing the AY51 with two QY50 modules
and a conversion adapter. Or, when replacing the A616AD with QY50
two Q68ADV(I) modules and a conversion adapter.
In both cases, the existing wired terminal blocks can be used.

Conversion
adapter
Existing AY51 terminal block

43
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

4.3 Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module replacement upgrade tool

Solution and Benefit


• The MELSEC-AnS Series / MELSEC-Q Series upgrade tool conversion adapter (manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.) reduces wiring time as the AnS / QnAS (Small Type)
series 16-point terminal block type module’s terminal block can be used without modification.
• New mounting holes do not need to be drilled as the MELSEC-AnS Series/MELSEC-Q Series
upgrade tool base adapter (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.) can be
mounted with the existing main / extension base unit mounting holes.

MELSEC-AnS Series / MELSEC-Q Series upgrade tool


(manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)
The MELSEC-AnS Series/MELSEC-Q Series upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering
Co., Ltd.) is comprised of the base adapter and conversion adapter.
This tool can be used with just the base adapter or conversion adapter.
• Base adapter
This adapter is used to mount the Q Series base unit using the mounting holes for the existing AnS/QnAS
(Small Type) base unit.
• Conversion adapter
This adapter is used to mount the existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module’s terminal block onto the Q
Series I/O module or analog module after replacement.
(The terminal block and wiring are used in the original state.)

Existing AnS Series Q Series

Upgrade tool
(Base adapter)

Upgrade tool
(Conversion adapter)

Use existing wiring FA goods


for I/O module

When replacing the AnS Series I/O module with the


Q Series I/O module, the FA goods conversion module AC DC
and interface terminal module can also be used. AC lamp DC lamp

DC24V

44
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

A. List of conversion adapters


MELSEC-AnS/QnAS Series MELSEC-Q Series
Module type Conversion adapter model*1*2
module model module model
A1SX10, A1SX10EU QX10 ERNT-ASQTXY10
A1SX40, A1SX40-S2 QX40
Input ERNT-ASQTX40
A1SX40-S1 QX40-S1
A1SX80, A1SX80-S1,
QX80 ERNT-ASQTX80
A1SX80-S2
A1SY10, A1SY10EU QY10 ERNT-ASQTXY10
A1SY22 QY22 ERNT-ASQTY22
Output A1SY40, A1SY40P QY40P ERNY-ASQTY40
A1SY50 QY50 ERNY-ASQTY50
A1SY80 QY80 ERNY-ASQTY80
A1S64AD Q64AD ERNY-ASQT64AD
Analog input Q68ADV
A1S68AD ERNY-ASQT68AD
Q68ADI
A1S62DA Q62DAN ERNY-ASQT62DA
Analog output A1S68DAV Q68DAVN
ERNY-ASQT68DA
A1S68DAI Q68DAIN
*1: The module mounting slot position differs, so the wiring length must be adjusted.
*2: If the I/O modules are mounted adjacently using the conversion adapter, mounting may not be possible if the existing wires are thick or
there are many wires. If the wires interfere, lift the wires up toward the front so they are out of the way. If the wires still interfere, leave
one slot open to ensure space for the wires.
Refer to the “Upgrade Tool General Catalog” issued by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. for details.

B. Base adapter
MELSEC-AnS/QnAS Series MELSEC-Q Series
Module type Base adapter model
module model module model
Q33B ERNT-ASQB33
A1S33B
Q33B»QA1S51B ERNT-ASQB33-S1*1
Q35B ERNT-ASQB35
Main base unit A1S35B
Q35B»QA1S51B ERNT-ASQB35-S1*2
Q38B ERNT-ASQB38
A1S38B
Q38B»QA1S51B ERNT-ASQB38-S1*3
Extension base unit A1S65B Q65B ERNT-ASQB65
(with power supply) A1S68B Q68B ERNT-ASQB68
Extension base unit ERNT-ASQB55
A1S55B Q55B
(without power supply)
A1SJCPU
CPU/base unit Q00JCPU
A1SJCPU-S3 ERNT-ASQB00J
integrated type Q00UJCPU
A1SJHCPU
*1: The width is 36 mm larger, so mounting space must be secured. (No need to additionally drill mounting holes)
*2: The width is 22 mm larger, so mounting space must be secured. (No need to additionally drill mounting holes)
*3: Mountable within existing space (No need to additionally drill mounting holes)

45
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

Tip
• External wiring work is eliminated by directly mounting the existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) I/O module
terminal block.
When using the conversion adapter, the terminal block cover (enclosed with conversion adapter) must be
replaced.
• When replacing the AnS/QnAS Series I/O module with connector type external connection method (wiring),
the existing wiring can be used. (The connector, with wires attached, can be connected to the Q Series
module.) Note that after replacement, the Q Series does not have a D-sub 37-pin connector type I/O
module, so the wiring must be changed to a 40-pin connector.
Note that units with and without the conversion adapter can be used together on the same base unit.
• If replacement is difficult from the existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) I/O module, the module can be replaced
with the FA goods interface terminal module.(Example: When A1SX20 is replaced, two QX28 modules will
be required. This increases the number of modules and changes the address. By selecting QX40 and
providing the FA goods terminal module “FA-TH16X200A31L” externally, the number of modules does not
need to be increased, and the address will not change.)
• When replacing a system containing an A Series large type extension base unit connected to the
AnS/QnASCPU to the Q Series, the “Q Series large type base unit, Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
Upgrade Tool” can be used to replace the A Series large type extension base unit and mounted modules.
Refer to the following section for tips on selecting the “Q Series large base unit, Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd. Upgrade Tool” in this case.
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals) L(NA)08043
Examples of MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Transitions L-08121 (-B and higher)
Note that the CPU/base unit integrated CPU type cannot be used with the Q Series large extension base
unit.
• For details on the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., please contact
your local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.

46
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

4.4 Select the DC input module replacement module

Tips for selecting replacement module


A. Rated input voltage
When selecting the replacement for the DC input module, many of the existing A (Large Type) and A
(Small Type) modules have a rated input voltage of 5, 12 or 24 V DC.
The replacement Q Series module is 12 V (some units are 5 or 12 V DC) or 24 V DC so the selected
module may differ depending on the existing module working state.
Always confirm the working state of the existing module when selecting the replacement.
(Excerpt from L(N)08043: Replacement Handbook)

B. Common terminal arrangement


A positive common type and negative common type DC input module are available.
The existing A (Large Type) and A (Small Type) have positive common/negative common shared types.
When selecting a replacement for the positive common/negative common shared type, a positive common type
or negative common type must be selected since a shared type is not available with the Q Series modules.
Always confirm the working state of the existing module when selecting the replacement.
Refer to the following handbooks for detailed specifications on each module.
• Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals):
L(NA)08043
• Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals):
L(NA)08219
Also check the I/O Module User’s Guide for the relevant module.
(*IB-66140: I/O Module Type Building Block User's Manual
IB-66541: AnS Module Type I/O User's Manual excerpt )
Internal circuit External switch Internal circuit
External switch 1 Photo coupler LED
1 Photo coupler R TB1
R LED LED
Internal
R
R circuit
Internal circuit

8 Internal
8
− + 9 circuit
+ − 9 TB17
DC12/24V DC12/24V LED
10
10 Photo coupler
R
R − + TB9. 18

+ −
17 17
18 DC12/24V
− + + − 18
DC12/24V DC12/24V

C. Using existing wiring


(1)Terminal block type module
When replacing the terminal block type module, the existing A (Large Type) or A (Small Type) module’s
terminal block can be used in the wired state by using the conversion adapter. This eliminates the need to
change the wiring.
(2)Connector type module
If the connector type on the connector type module is the same (i.e., 40-pin connector to 40-pin connector,
etc.), the wiring can be used.
If the connector type differs (i.e., D-sub 37-pin connector to 40-pin connector, etc.), the wiring must be
changed.

47
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

A. Example of selecting A (Large Type) module replacement


Existing module Replacement module
Working conditions Remarks
Module model Module model Conversion
Working voltage Common terminal
arrangement adapter

AX40 24V Positive QX40


ERNT-AQTX40
AX40-UL(Positive common) 12V Positive QX70
•Terminal block l 40-pin connector
AX41 QX41 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
(Positive common) 24V Positive
AX41-UL ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block l 40-pin connector
(Positive common) QX41-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12V Shared QX71 •Terminal block l 40-pin connector
•Terminal block l 40-pin connector
QX41-S1 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
AX41-S1 24V Positive
(Positive common) ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block l 40-pin connector
QX41-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA

12V Shared QX71 •Terminal block l 40-pin connector


QX42
24V Positive ̶
AX42(Positive common) QX41-S2(two modules needed) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12V Positive QX72
AX42-S1(Positive common) 24V Positive QX42-S1 ̶
AX50(Positive common) Positive
AX50-S1 48V QX50 ERNT-AQTX40
Shared
(Positive/negative common)
AX60 (Positive common)
100V — •Example of replacing to
AX60-S1 (No replacement module) QX40+FA-TH16X100D31L
(Positive/negative common)
Positive QX40-S1 ERNT-AQTX40
AX70 24V
Negative QX80 ERNT-AQTX80
(Positive/negative common shared)
5/12V Shared QX70 ERNT-AQTX40
Positive QX41-S1 ERNT-AQTX41
AX71 24v
Negative QX81-S2 ERNT-AQTX81 •Terminal block l D-sub 37-pin connector
(Positive/negative common shared)
5/12V Shared QX71 ERNT-AQTX41
AX80(negative common) 24V Negative QX80 ERNT-AQTX80
AX80E(negative common) 5/12V Shared QX70 ERNT-AQTX40 •5 V DC is available only for AX80
•Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
QX81
•Terminal block l D-sub 37-pin connector
AX81 24V Negative ERNT-AQTX81
(negative common) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX81-S2 •Terminal block l D-sub 37-pin connector
12V Shared QX71 ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block l 40-pin connector
AX81B(Positive/negative common
24V — (No replacement module) •Consider using QX81
shared with wire breakage detection)
Positive QX41-S1 ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block l 40-pin connector
•Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
QX81 •Terminal block l D-sub 37-pin connector
AX81-S1 24V Negative ERNT-AQTX81
(Positive/negative common shared) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX81-S2 •Terminal block l D-sub 37-pin connector
12V Shared QX71 ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block l 40-pin connector
48V QX50(two modules needed) —
AX81-S2
Negative •Consider using QX81, and inserting a
(negative common) 60V (No replacement module)
8.2 kΩ (1 W or larger) resistor in series
•Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
QX81 •Terminal block l D-sub 37-pin connector
AX81-S3 24V Negative ERNT-AQTX81
(negative common) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX81-S2 •Terminal block l D-sub 37-pin connector
12V Shared QX71 ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block l 40-pin connector
•Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
QX82
AX82 24V Negative •D-sub 37-pin connector to 40-pin connector

(negative common) QX81-S2(two modules needed) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12V Shared QX72 •D-sub 37-pin connector to 40-pin connector

48
4. Replacement utilizing upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

B. Example of replacing A (Small Type) module


Existing module Replacement module
Working conditions Remarks
Module model Module model Conversion
Working voltage Common terminal
arrangement adapter
Positive QX40 ERNT-ASQTX40
24V
Negative QX80 ERNT-ASQTX80
A1SX30
12V Shared QX70 ERNT-ASQTX40
(Positive/negative common)
Consider rectifying and smoothing 24 V AC
AC12/24V — (No replacement module) externally, and then input into QX40
24V Positive QX40
A1SX40(Positive common) ERNT-ASQTX40
12V Shared QX70
A1SX40-S1(Positive common) 24V Positive QX40-S1 ERNT-ASQTX40
A1SX40-S2(Positive common) 24V Positive QX40 ERNT-ASQTX40
QX41 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
24V Positive
A1SX41(Positive common) QX41-S2 — •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12V Positive QX71
A1SX41-S1(Positive common) 24V Positive QX41-S1 —
QX41 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
A1SX41-S2(Positive common) 24V Positive —
QX41-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX42
24V Positive
A1SX42(Positive common) QX41-S2(two modules needed) — •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12V Positive QX72
A1SX42-S1(Positive common) 24V Positive QX42-S1 —
QX42 —
A1SX42-S2 24V Positive
QX41-S2(two modules needed) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX41-S1 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
Positive
A1SX71 24V QX41-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
(Positive/negative common shared) —
Negative QX81-S2 •D-sub 37-pin connector to 40-pin connector
5/12V Shared QX71
Positive QX40 ERNT-ASQTX40
A1SX80 24V
(Positive/negative common shared) Negative QX80 ERNT-ASQTX80
12V Shared QX70 ERNT-ASQTX40
A1SX80-S1/S2 Positive QX40 ERNT-ASQTX40
(Positive/negative common shared) 24V
Negative QX80 ERNT-ASQTX80
Positive QX41-S2
A1SX81 24V
Negative QX81-S2 —
(Positive/negative common shared)
12V Shared QX71
A1SX81-S2 Positive QX41-S2 •D-sub 37-pin connector to 40-pin connector
24V —
(Positive/negative common shared) Negative QX81-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
A1SX81-S1 Positive QX42
24V —
(Positive/negative common shared) Negative QX82-S1

49
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool


[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]
A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)

A. A0J2 renewal tool features


The A0J2 renewal tool is used to replace existing A0J2(H) systems with the Q Series. It consists of an
interface module where the existing wired terminal block can be mounted and a base adapter which enables
utilization of the existing installation holes, etc.
A variety of installation methods are available to fit the installation space.

B. Interface module features


The interface module has DC to relay output conversion and AC to DC input conversion functions. Hence,
replacement is possible using the interface module along with Q Series connector type DC I/O modules.
Dedicated cables are used to connect the interface module to Q Series I/O modules.

C. Installation types
(1) Stackable type
• Existing mounting holes can be used.
• Suitable when there is enough depth.
Note: Depth of 195 mm (when one interface module
is stacked)/236 mm (when two interface
236 mm

modules are stacked) or more is required.

(2) Flat mounting type


• Existing mounting holes can be used. However,
enough depth and space above the existing
modules are required.
(A space of 62 mm + 30 mm (for heat dissipation)
158 mm

is required above existing modules)


(A depth of 158mm is required.)
62
• The required depth is less than that of the mm

stackable type.

(3) Standalone type


• Although space to install the main base unit
separately is needed, a base unit with a larger
number of I/O slots can be installed. Suitable
when there is not enough space in the existing
A0J2(H).
W
W = 189 mm (for Q33B: 3 I/O slots),
245 mm (for Q35B: 5 I/O slots),
328 mm (for Q38B: 8 I/O slots)

*Depth of A0J2 Series modules is 41 mm per module. (i.e., Total depth of two I/O modules and a CPU is 123 mm.)
Depth of the A0J2HCPUP21 data link module is 68 mm.

50
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

D. Structure

Programmable controller

Mounting plate
(for fixing programmable controller)
· 3 slots (standard)
· 5 slots (option (Order separately))
Mounting frame (2-level, for stackable type)

Terminal block
(For 100/200 V AC, 24 V DC relay)
Interface module (for 24�/28��)

Interface module (for 56��)


Shape after assembly

Base adapter (for 56��) Large width base adapter

Indicates a part of the programmable controller fixing frame set. (For configuring SC-A0JQSEL-U2)

E. Basic configuration

Current configuration New configuration


A0J2(H) Series Q Series programmable controller A0J2 renewal tool
programmable controller • Main base unit (Q33B) • Interface module*2
• CPU module • Power supply module • Programmable controller
• I/O module (Q62P)*1 fixing frame set*3
• CPU module • Programmable controller
• I/O module connection cable

*1: The interface modules, with the exception of certain models, require 24 V DC power supply. If the Q62P
is not used, provide a separate external power supply.
*2: Refer to the next page for a list of the applicable interface modules.
*3: Includes a base adapter, mounting plate, mounting frame, terminal block, and power cable.
For details of the programmable controller fixing frame set, base adapter, and mounting plate, please
contact your local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.

51
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

F. Compatible interface module list


(Available models)
Model to be discontinued Alternative model
Model Alternative programmable controller I/O module
Product name (A0J2/compact type Interface module
NET/MINI) Q Series AnS Series CC-Link
A0J2-E32A/ SC-A0JQIF-32A
Intput AJ35PTF-32A -S1*1
A1SX41 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
module A0J2-E32D/ SC-A0JQIF-32D
AJ35PTF-32D -S1*1
A0J2-E24R/
SC-A0JQIF-24R
AJ35PTF-24R
Output A0J2-E24S/
A1SY41P AJ65SBTCF1-32T SC-A0JQIF-24S
module AJ35PTF-24S
A0J2-E24T/
SC-A0JQIF-24T
AJ35PTF-24T
A0J2-E28AR/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-28AR
AJ35PTF-28AR A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E28AS/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-28AS
AJ35PTF-28AS A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E28DR/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
QX41Y41P SC-A0JQIF-28DR
AJ35PTF-28DR A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E28DS/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-28DS
AJ35PTF-28DS A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E28DT/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-28DT
AJ35PTF-28DT A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
I/O module
A0J2-E56AR/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56AR
AJ35PTF-56AR A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E56AS/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56AS
AJ35PTF-56AS A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E56DR/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56DR
AJ35PTF-56DR A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E56DS/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56DS
AJ35PTF-56DS A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E56DT/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56DT
AJ35PTF-56DT A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T

* The installation size is the same as that of AC-A0JQIF56��. Be aware that the installation size will become
larger.
For the installation size and installation precautions of AC-A0JQIF32�-S1, please contact your local
Mitsubishi sales office or representative.

52
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

G. Programmable controller connection cable (connecting interface module and


programmable controller I/O module)

Model Specifications*
SC-A0JQC03M Cable length: 0.35 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
SC-A0JQC10M Cable length: 1.0 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
SC-A0JQC20M Cable length: 2.0 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
SC-A0JQC30M Cable length: 3.0 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
SC-A0JQC50M Cable length: 5.0 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
* For cable length other than described above, please contact your local Mitsubishi sales office or
representative.

H. Interface module power supply


24 V DC must be supplied as the power source for the interface module.
The power can be supplied from the Q Series power supply module Q62P, but the capacity may be
insufficient depending on the module configuration.
Prepare an external 24 V DC supply if the Q62P 24 V DC capacity (0.6 A) is insufficient.

Model Interface module Module external power supply Relay drive power supply
SC-A0JQIF32D 200mA ―
Input module
SC-A0JQIF32A 210mA ―
SC-A0JQIF24R ― 230mA
Output module SC-A0JQIF24S 370mA ―
SC-A0JQIF24T 70mA ―
SC-A0JQIF28AR 105mA 125mA
SC-A0JQIF28AS 290mA ―
SC-A0JQIF28DR 100mA 125mA
SC-A0JQIF28DS 285mA ―
I/O module SC-A0JQIF28DT 130mA ―
SC-A0JQIF56AR 210mA 230mA
SC-A0JQIF56AS 580mA ―
SC-A0JQIF56DR 200mA 230mA
SC-A0JQIF56DS 570mA ―
SC-A0JQIF56DT 260mA ―
* The above module external power supply sources include the programmable controller
side I/O module external wiring 24 V DC.
However, these do not include the CC-Link I/O module power supply when replacing to the CC-Link.

53
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

5.1 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring

Solution and Benefit


• Existing A0J2 I/O wiring can be mounted on the A0J2 renewal tool without modification.
• The A0J2 renewal tool takes in AC/DC input and sends these signals to a programmable
controller's input module. It also outputs the signals received from a programmable controller's
output module to the external devices. Therefore, any A0J2 Series I/O modules can be replaced
with QX41Y41P by selecting the appropriate A0J2 renewal tool.
• QX41Y41P, the 64-point I/O combined module (32-point input for the first half and 32-point output
for the second half), can be used to replace the A0J2 Series I/O modules without changing the I/O
assignment.
• The installation size of the A0J2 renewal tool is the same as that of the A0J2-E56� I/O modules,
eliminating the need of making new holes.

The following is an example of replacing an A0J2(H) system with Q Series using the A0J2 renewal tool.

A. Instructions
(1) Replace the A0J2H Series CPU with a Q Series CPU and the I/O modules with QX41Y41P. The existing
I/O address can be used for the QX41Y41P.
(2) When the A0J2 renewal tool is used to mount the terminal blocks of the existing A0J2 I/O modules, the
existing external wiring does not need to be changed.
* The A0J2 renewal tool is not assigned an I/O module number. The "No.=n" in the new configuration keeps
track of the order of connection with the modules on the programmable controller side to avoid changes in
I/O addresses. Check the I/O module number in the current configuration and connect the programmable
controller side modules accordingly.

B. System configuration example

Current configuration

A0JC01 A0JC01 A0JC03 A0JC03


A0J2E56DR

A0J2E56DR

A0J2E56DR
A0J2HCPU

A0J2E24R

No. 3 No. 0 No. 1 No. 2


YE0 to YF7 X00 to X1F X40 to X5F X80 to X9F
Y20 to Y37 Y60 to Y77 YA0 to YB7 * "n" of No.=n indicates the I/O module number.

54
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

New configuration

(1) When the stackable type is used ··· With mounting plates for fixing frame set

QY41P
Q00UCPU

QX41

QX41

QX41
Y41P

Y41P

Y41P
Empty

Empty
Q61P
Q61P
X00... YE0... X40... X80...

SC-A0JQC03M (0.35 m I/O connection cable) x 5


Q33B QC06B Q63B SC-A0JQC10M (1.0 m I/O connection cable) x 2

SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF24R

No. =3 No. =0 No. =1 No. =2

SC-A0JQSEL-U2 SC-A0JQSEL-U1 SC-A0JQBSL


(2-level stackable type) (1-level stackable type) (Standalone type)

(a) Module selection example (Q Series)

Product name Existing model Stackable type replacement model


Power supply module Q61P 2
CPU module Q00UCPU 1
A0J2HCPU 1
Main base unit Q33B 1
Extension base unit Q63B 1
I/O module A0J2-E56DR 3 QX41Y41P 3
Output module A0J2-E24R 1 QY41P 1
Extension cable A0JC01/A0JC03 4 QC06B (0.6 m) 1

(b) Module selection example (A0J2 renewal tool)

Product name Stackable type replacement model Remarks


SC-A0JQIF56DR 3
Interface module
SC-A0JQIF24R 1
Programmable controller SC-A0JQSEL-U2 1
fixing frame set SC-A0JQSEL-U1 1
Mounting plate Change the adapter plate for
SC-A0JQPT3 1
(for Q63B) Q33B with the one for Q63B.
Base adapter
SC-A0JQBSL 1
(for standalone type)
Programmable controller SC-A0JQC03M 5 Cable length: 0.35 m
connection cable SC-A0JQC10M 2 Cable length: 1.0 m

55
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

(2) When the stackable type is used ··· With a 5-slot base unit

QY41P
Q00UCPU

QX41

QX41

QX41
Y41P

Y41P

Y41P

Empty
Q61P
X00... X40... X80... YE0...

SC-A0JQC03M (0.35 m I/O connection cable) x 3


SC-A0JQC10M (1.0 m I/O connection cable) x 4
Q35B

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF24R

No. =3 No. =0 No. =1 No. =2

SC-A0JQSEL-U2 SC-A0JQBSL SC-A0JQBSL


(2-level stackable type) (Standalone type) (Standalone type)

Size description (2-level stackable type: 5-slot base unit is used)

(Q35B)

Q Series programmable controller


236
About

E24R
100

E56DR

29 190 29 Unit: mm

(a) Module selection example (Q Series)


Product name Existing model Stackable type replacement model
Power supply module Q61P 1
CPU module A0J2HCPU 1 Q00UCPU 1
Main base unit Q35B 1
I/O module A0J2-E56DR 3 QX41Y41P 3
Output module A0J2-E24R 1 QY41P 1
(CPU built-in power supply 24 V DC power supply module
24 V DC power supply module - -
is used.) (Commercially available)

(b) Module selection example (A0J2 renewal tool)


Product name Stackable type replacement model Remarks
SC-A0JQIF56DR 3
Interface module
SC-A0JQIF24R 1
Programmable controller
SC-A0JQSEL-U2 1
fixing frame set

Mounting plate 29 mm width increase on both sides as


SC-A0JQPT5 compared to the plate for Q33B. (For replacing
(for Q65B) 1
the fixing frame set SC-A0JQPT3)
Base adapter For E56 (mounting plate)
SC-A0JQBSL 2
(for standalone type) * Required for standalone type
Programmable controller SC-A0JQC03M 3 Cable length: 0.35 m
connection cable SC-A0JQC10M 4 Cable length: 1.0 m

56
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

(3) When the standalone type is used

QY41P
QX41

QX41

QX41
Q00UCPU

Y41P

Y41P

Y41P

Empty
Q61P
X00... X40... X80... YE0...

SC-A0JQC10M (1.0 m I/O connection cable) x 7


Q35B

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF24R

No. =3 No. =0 No. =1 No. =2

SC-A0JQBSL SC-A0JQBSL SC-A0JQBSL


(Standalone type) (Standalone type) (Standalone type)

(a) Module selection example (Q Series)


Product name Existing model Standalone type replacement model
Power supply module Q61P 1
CPU module Q00UCPU 1
A0J2HCPU 1
Main base unit Q35B 1
Extension base unit N/A -
I/O module A0J2-E56DR 3 QX41Y41P 3
Output module A0J2-E24R 1 QY41P 1
Extension cable A0JC01/A0JC03 4 N/A -
(b) Module selection example (A0J2 renewal tool)
Product name Standalone type replacement model Remarks
SC-A0JQIF56DR 3
Interface module
SC-A0JQIF24R 1
Base adapter
SC-A0JQBSL 3
(for standalone type)
Programmable controller
SC-A0JQC10M 7 Cable length: 1.0 m
connection cable

Tip
• When using the stackable type, check that there is enough depth.
Also, check the width when using a programmable controller main/extension base unit with 5 slots because it
may have increased.
• Select the appropriate cable length between the interface module and the programmable controller (I/O
module) depending on the system configuration.
• The I/O addresses (X/Y addresses) of existing A0J2 I/O modules are preset according to the I/O module
numbers. Check the I/O module number that has been set for each existing module.
Connect the A0J2 renewal tool with the I/O modules in a way that the same I/O addresses are used when
upgrading to Q Series CPU.
• When an output-only module such as SC-A0JQIF24R is used, selecting QY41P as the programmable
controller side module changes the I/O addresses and requires program modification.
In this case, the start I/O address of the affected slots can be re-assigned in I/O assignment of Q Series CPU
parameter in order to avoid changes to the program.
• 24 V DC output power supply of the Q62P can be used as an external power supply for the A0J2 renewal
tool. However, depending on the number of modules used, an extra power supply may be needed. In this
case, prepare an external 24 V DC power supply.

57
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

5.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H remote I/O network system (using A0J2 renewal tool)

Solution and Benefit


• Using the A0J2 renewal tool, A0J2R25/A0J2P25 remote I/O stations can be replaced with
MELSECNET/H remote I/O stations without modifying external wiring.
• By making the same network parameter settings as the current ones, program modifications can
be avoided.

The following is an example of upgrading a MELSECNET network system consisting of only remote I/O stations
to a MELSECNET/H remote I/O network system using the A0J2 renewal tool.
A. Instructions
(1) Replace the MELSECNET network system with MELSECNET/H remote I/O network system. The network
parameter settings remain the same, and it is not necessary to make changes to the program.
(2) Change the cable system from MELSECNET coaxial loop to MELSECNET/H coaxial bus. New wires are
not necessary because the existing coaxial loop cables can be used.

B. System configuration example

Current configuration

Master station
A0J2E56DR

A0J2E56DR
A0J2R25

A0J2R25
Power supply

A2NCPUR21

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

Empty

X80 to X9F XC0 to XDF


MELSECNET (Coaxial loop) YA0 to YB7 YE0 to YF7

Replace

New configuration (when the stackable type is used)


Q35B Q33B Q33B
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

QX41Y

QX41Y
QJ71BR11

QJ72BR15

QJ72BR15
41P

41P
Q01U
CPU

Empty

Empty
Empty

Empty
Q62P

Q62P

Q62P

MELSECNET/H (Coaxial bus) R R


Coaxial bus
SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR
Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

SC-A0JQSEL-U1 SC-A0JQSEL-U1
(1-level stackable type) (1-level stackable type)

SC-A0JQ03M (0.35 m I/O connection cable) x 4

58
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

C. Module selection example


(1) Q Series

Product name Existing model Replacemant model


Power supply module A62P 1 Q62P (with 24V DC) 3
CPU module A2NCPUR21 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit (master station) A35B 1 Q35B 1
Main base unit (remote I/O station) N/A - Q33B 2
MELSECNET/H master station module N/A - QJ71BR11 1
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station module A0J2R25 2 QJ72BR15 2
I/O module A0J2-E56DR 2 QX41Y41P 2
Terminating resistor for coaxial bus link (75 Ω) - - A6RCON-R75 2

(2) A0J2 renewal tool

Product name Model Remarks


Interface module SC-A0JQIF56DR 2
Programmable controller fixing frame set SC-A0JQSEL-U1 2
Programmable controller connection cable SC-A0JQC03M 4 Cable length (0.35 m)

Tip
• The overall distance of coaxial bus is 500 m (when using 5C2V). Use the following product to extend the
distance up to 2.5 km.
"Repeater Unit for the MELSECNET/10 Coaxial Bus System type A6BR10"
• When upgrading an optical loop network system, use the “QJ71LP21-25 for the master station” and the
“QJ72LP25-25 for the remote I/O station” so that the optical loop can be maintained.
The distance between stations differs depending on the type of optical fiber cables used in the existing
system. Refer to “Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference (Remote I/O network)”
SH-080124 for details.

59
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

5.3 Replace MELSECNET/MINI compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link
(using A0J2 renewal tool)
Solution and Benefit
• By mounting existing terminal blocks on the A0J2 renewal tool (interface module), the compact
type remote I/O modules can be replaced with CC-Link modules without modifying external
wiring.
• Existing compact type remote I/O modules and A0J2 renewal tools have the same number of I/O
points, realizing the system upgrade without program modification.
* For details on the A0J2 renewal tool, refer to chapter 5, "Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series
using A0J2 renewal tool".

The following is an example of replacing MELSECNET/MINI compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link
using the A0J2 renewal tool.
A. Instructions
(1) Select connector type CC-Link I/O modules to allow connection with the A0J2 renewal tools.
(2) Replace the compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link modules using the A0J2 renewal tools, and
directly mount the existing terminal block on the interface modules to eliminate wiring modification.

B. System configuration example


Current configuration
Terminal AJ71PT

Terminal block

Terminal block
Terminal block
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

32-S3
A2NCPU

AJ35PTF-56DR

AJ35PTF-56DR

AJ35PTF-56DR
A61P

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block


block

A35B

Replace
New configuration

SC-A0JQPT2 SC-A0JQPT2 SC-A0JQPT2


I/O module

I/O module

QJ61BT
I/O module

I/O module
Q01U

11N
CPU
Q61P

AJ65SBTCF1-32D AJ65SBTCF1-32D AJ65SBTCF1-32D

AJ65SBTCF1-32T AJ65SBTCF1-32T AJ65SBTCF1-32T

The twisted pair


communication cables
must be replaced with
CC-Link dedicated
cables.
Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

SC-A0J SC-A0J SC-A0J


QIF56DR QIF56DR QIF56DR

SC-A0JQSEL-U1 SC-A0JQSEL-U1 SC-A0JQSEL-U1


(1-level stackable type) (1-level stackable type) (1-level stackable type)

60
5. Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 renewal tool
[Use A0J2 renewal tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

C. Module selection example


(1) Q Series
Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P (without 24V DC) 1
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35B 1
CC-Link (master module) AJ71PT32-S3 1 QJ61BT11N 1
CC-Link input module AJ65SBTCF1-32D 3
AJ35PTF-56DR 3
CC-Link output module AJ65SBTCF1-32T 3
Note: Select appropriate I/O modules according to specifications of existing modules.

(2) A0J2 renewal tool


Product name Model Remarks
Interface module SC-A0JQIF56DR 3
Programmable controller fixing frame set SC-A0JQSEL-U1 3 For 1-level stackable type
Mounting plate SC-A0JQPT2 3 For CC-Link I/O modules
Programmable controller connection cable SC-A0JQC03M 6 Cable length (0.35 m)

(CC-Link stackable type)

Tip
• MELSECNET/MINI twisted pair cables must be replaced with CC-Link dedicated cables.
• CC-Link I/O modules and A0J2 renewal tools (interface modules) require 24 V DC power supply in addition to
power supply for control. Prepare a 24 V DC power supply separately.
• When using the stackable type renewal tool as shown in the example, make sure there is enough depth.
The mounting plate for CC-Link I/O modules is sold separately. (Required depth: 120 mm or more)
• Up to two CC-Link I/O modules can be mounted on the 1-level stackable type renewal tool. To replace 2-level
compact type remote I/O modules, select the standalone type renewal tool. If the 2-level stackable type
renewal tool is selected, two CC-Link I/O modules cannot be mounted.

61
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules


6.1 Use A/QnA (Large Type) Series QA6�B extension base unit

Solution and Benefit


• The QA6�B extension base unit permits reuse of existing A Series modules, minimizing wiring
time.
• The system can be upgraded even if Q Series compatible modules do not exist.

The following is an example of reusing existing A Series modules with a Q Series CPU using the QA extension
base unit.

A. Instructions
(1) Replace the A Series CPU with the Q Series CPU (Q06HCPU), remove existing A Series modules on the
A38B main base unit, and then remount them on the QA68B extension base unit.
(The main base unit is Q Series.)
(2) Replace the modules with Q Series as needed and mount them on the Q Series main base unit.
(3) Assign I/O numbers. If possible, do not make changes to the existing setting.

B. System configuration example

Current configuration New configuration


Q06UDH
CPU

QJ71E71
QJ61BT

Empty

Empty
Q61P

BR11
QJ71

-100
11N
AJ71E71N3-T

Q35B
A68DAI-S1

AJ71BR11
AJ61BT11
A3NCPU

A68AD

A68AD
A61P

AX41

AY10

Replace Modules upgraded


from the A Series

A38B
A68DAI-S1
A68AD

A68AD
Empty

Empty

Empty
A61P

AX41

AY10

QC06B
QA68B

Existing A Series Slots left empty becase


modules these modules were upgraded
to the Q Series

62
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

C. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module (for main base unit) N/A - Q61P 1
CPU module A3NCPU 1 Q06UDHCPU 1
Main base unit A38B 1 Q35B 1
CC-Link master module AJ61BT11 1 QJ61BT11N 1
MELSECNET/10 network module AJ71BR11 1 QJ71BR11 1
Ethernet module AJ71E71N3-T 1 QJ71E71-100 1
Extension base unit N/A - QA68B 1
Power supply module (for extension base unit) A61P 1 Utilize existing module -
Extension cable N/A - QC06B 1
Input module AX41 1 Utilize existing module -
Output module AY10 1 Utilize existing module -
Analog input module A68AD 2 Utilize existing module -
Analog output module A68DAI-S1 1 Utilize existing module -

Tip
• The following A Series modules need to be replaced with a Q Series CPU compatible model.
CC-Link master/local module
MELSECNET/10 network module
Ethernet module
Computer link module
etc.
• After the replacement, the I/O address should match the I/O assignment settings of the original system.Base
Unit User’s Manual".
• The QA6�B extension base units and QA1S6�B extension base units are only compatible with High
Performance Model QCPU or Universal Model QCPU (first five digits of serial No. “13102” or higher).
Basic Model QCPUs, Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs, Safety CPUs, and Remote I/O Stations are not
compatible.
• For precautions and restrictions when using QA6�B extension base unit, refer to "QA65B/QA68B Extension
Base Unit User’s Manual".

63
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

6.2 Use QA conversion adapter module to utilize existing I/O modules and
extension base units with Q Series CPU (Use QA conversion adapter)
Solution and Benefit
The QA conversion adapter module enables the existing extension base, including the mounted I/O
modules, to connect to a Q Series main base unit. This can shorten the installation and wiring
modification times.

The following is an example of reusing existing A Series modules with a Q Series CPU using the QA conversion
adapter module.

A. Instructions
(1) Replace the A Series CPU with the Q Series CPU (Q02HCPU) and mount it on the Q Series main base
unit (Q3�B).
(2) To reutilize I/O modules mounted on the existing A Series main base unit, mount them on the QA6�B
extension base unit.
(3) Mount the “QA6ADP” adapter on the connector of each existing extension base unit to allow the use
of existing modules.
(4) Connect the base units with the Q Series extension cable (QC�B).

B. System configuration example


Current configuration New configuration
Replace the ACPU
with a QCPU
Q03UD
CPU
Q Series modules
Q61P
A3ACPU
A61P

AX42

AX42

AX42

AX42

AX42

are mountable
Q35B
QC06B
A35B X00... Extension base stage 1

Remount the
A61P

AX42

AX42

AX42

AX42

AX42
modules on the
QA6�B.

AC06B
QA65B X00...
QC06B
Extension base stage 1
Extension base stage 2

Utilize the modules


A61P

AX41

AX41

AY42

AY42

AY42

and extension base unit.


A61P

AX41

AX41

AY42

AY42

AY42

*
QA6 Extension stage
ADP number setting: 2nd stage
A65B X140...
A65B X140...
AC06B
QC06B
Extension base stage 2 Extension base stage 3

Utilize the modules


A61P

AY42

AY42

AY42

AY41

AY41

A61P

AY42

AY42

AY42

AY41

AY41

and extension base unit. *


QA6 Extension stage
ADP number setting: 3rd stage
A65B Y240... A65B Y240...
* The extension stage number of the QA conversion adapter
The adapter allows the A Series extension base unit to be used
should be set in accordance with that of the extension base unit.
as the QCPU's extension base unit. (Max. 7 extension stages)

64
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

C. Module selection example

Product name Existing model Replacement model


Power supply module (for main base unit) N/A - Q61P 1
Power supply module (for extension base unit) A61P (main/extension base unit) 3 Utilize existing module -
CPU module A3ACPU 1 Q03UDCPU*1 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35B*2 1
Extension base unit (1st stage) N/A - QA65B*3 1
Extension base unit A65B 2 Utilize existing module -
QA conversion adapter module N/A - QA6ADP 2
Extension cable N/A - QC06B*4 3
Input module Utilize existing module
Output module Utilize existing module
*1: Select the module depending on the existing program capacity and contents.
*2: Used to mount the Q Series CPU.
*3: Used to mount modules on the existing main base unit.
*4: Select the cable length according to the arrangement of base units.

Tip
• The existing A Series base unit and mounted modules can be utilized without wiring modification. Also, the
I/O modules on the existing A Series main base unit are just remounted on the QA6�B extension base unit
without the need for rewiring.
• By using the same I/O address for the existing modules, program modifications can be minimized.
• The following A Series modules need to be replaced with a Q Series CPU compatible model.
CC-Link master/local module
MELSECNET/10 network module
Ethernet module
Ethernet module, computer link module
etc.
• The A6�B/A5�B extension base unit with the QA6ADP cannot be used together with the QA1S6�B
extension base unit.
• When an AC input module is mounted on the “A5�B” extension base unit (without power supply) using the
QA6ADP, either the “A6�B with QA6ADP” or “QA6�B” extension base unit (with power supply) is required in
the system.
• Set the stage number for QA6ADP according to the setting of the extension base unit.
• The QA6ADP adapter is compatible with High Performance Model QCPUs only. Basic Model QCPUs,
Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs, Safety CPUs, Universal Model QCPUs, and Remote I/O Stations are not
compatible.
• The QA6ADP QA conversion adapter is only compatible with High Performance Model QCPU or Universal
Model QCPU (first five digits of serial No. “13102” or higher).
Basic Model QCPUs, Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs, Safety CPUs, and Remote I/O Stations are not
compatible.
• For the precautions and restrictions when using QA conversion adapter, refer to "QA6ADP QA Conversion
Adapter Module User’s Manual".

65
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

6.3 Use AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series QA1S6�B extension base unit

Solution and Benefit


•By using the current AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module, the wiring work during replacement can be
reduced. Replacements can be completed in a short time.
•Replacement is possible even if a compatible Q Series module is not available.
•If an extension base unit is connected to the current AnS/QnAS (Small Type) series, it can be used
together with the A/QnA (Large Type) QA6�B extension base unit.

The CPU can be replaced with the QCPU. An example of using a current A (Large Type) module without
modification to shorten the re-wiring man-hours is shown below.

A. Replacement conditions
(1) Only the CPU is replaced to the Q Series. The current I/O module is used.
Replace the existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) main base A1S35B to QA1S65B, and mount the existing
module.
(2) If the module must be replaced with the Q Series, select the module and then mount on the Q Series main
base unit.
(3) Avoid changing the current I/O assignments.

B. Example of replacing from current configuration (1)


Current configuration New configuration
Replace AnS/QnAS (Small Type)
CPU with QCPU
Q61P
Q01U

E71-100
CPU

Empty

Empty
QJ71
A2SHCPU
A1S61PN

A1SY41P

A1SY41P
A1SX41

A1SX41

A1SJ71
E71N

Q33B
X00∼ QC06B
A1S35B
Extension base stage 1

Replace AnS (Small Type)


A1S61PN

A1SY41P

A1SY41P

main base with QA1S�B,


A1SX41

A1SX41

Empty
and mount modules

X00∼
QA1S65B
Empty slot for replacing to
C. Module selection example Q Series module

Product name Existing module Replacement module


Power supply module (new) ― ― Q61P 1
Power supply module (for extension base) A1S61PN 1 Utilize existing module ―
CPU module A2SHCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A1S35B 1 Q33B*1 1
Extension base unit ― ― QA1S65B*2 1
Connection cable ― ― QC06B*3 1
Input module Use existing module in original state
Output module Use existing module in original state
Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71N-T 1 QJ71E71-100*4 1
*1: Used to mount the Q Series CPU.
*2: Used to mount modules on existing main base unit.
*3: Select the cable length according to the arrangement of base units.
*4: Must be replaced to Q Series module.

66
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

D. Example of replacing from current configuration (2)

Current configuration New configuration


Replace AnS/QnAS (Small Type)
CPU with QCPU

E71-100
Q01U
Q61P

CPU

Empty

Empty
QJ71
A2SHCPU
A1S61PN

A1SY41P

A1SY41P
A1SX41

A1SX41

A1SJ71
E71N
Q33B
X00∼ QC06B
A1S35B Extension base stage 1

Replace AnS (Small Type)

A1S61PN

A1SY41P

A1SY41P
A1SX41

A1SX41
main base with QA1S6�B,

Empty
and mount modules

AC06B X00∼
QA1S65B
Empty slot for replacing
QC06B with Q Series module
Extension base stage 1 Replace A (Large Type) Extension base stage 2
extension base QA6�B,
and mount modules

A68AD
A68AD
AY41P

AY41P

AY41P

AY41P
A61P

AX41

AX41

A61P

AX41

AX41
XD0∼ XD0∼
A65B QA65B

The QA1S extension base and mounted large type QA6ADP extension
base cannot be used together, so base must be replaced.
E. Module selection example
Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module (new) ― ― Q61P 1
Power supply module (for extension base 1st stage) A1S61PN 1 Utilize existing module ―
CPU module A2SHCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A1S35B 1 Q33B*1 1
Extension base unit (1st stage) ― ― QA1S65B*2 1
Connection cable ― ― QC06B*3 1
AnS (Small Type) input module Use existing module in original state
AnS (Small Type) output module Use existing module in original state
Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71N-T 1 QJ71E71-100*4 1
Power supply module (for extension base 2nd stage) A61P 1 Utilize existing module ―
Extension base unit (2nd stage) A65B 1 QA65B*5 1
Connection cable AC06B 1 QC06B*3 1
A (Large Type) input module Use existing module in original state
A (Large Type) output module Use existing module in original state
A (Large Type) analog I/O module Use existing module in original state
*1: Used to mount the Q Series CPU.
*2: Used to mount modules on existing main base unit.
*3: Select the cable length according to the arrangement of base units.
*4: Must be replaced to Q Series module.
*5: For re-mounting existing A large type extension base unit

67
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

Tip
• The existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) main base unit can be used without modifying the wiring by replacing
with the extension base QA1S6�B and remounting the mounted modules.
The existing A (Large Type) extension base unit can be used without modifying the wiring by replacing with
the extension base QA6�B, and remounting the mounted modules.
• The QA1S6�B extension base unit cannot be used together with the A (Large Type) extension base A6�
B/A5�B) onto which QA6ADP is mounted.
When using a module mounted on the existing A (Large Type) extension base unit, replace the base unit
with the QA6�B extension base.
• Connect the base units in the following order.
Q Series main base unit lQ Series extension base unit lQA1S6�B extension base lQA6�B
extension base
The GOT bus cannot be connected when the QA6�B extension base is connected.
The GOT bus can be connected when only the QA1S6�B extension bus is connected.
• Program modifications can be minimized by using the same I/O address for the existing units and setting the
current I/O addresses with the parameter I/O assignments.
• The following A/QnA (Large Type) module and AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module cannot be used with the Q
Series CPU.
These must be changed to a Q Series CPU compatible module.
CC-Link master/local module
MELSECNET/10 network module
Ethernet module, computer link module, etc.
• The QA1S6�B extension base and QA6�B extension base are only compatible with High Performance
Model QCPU or Universal Model QCPU (first five digits of serial No. “13102” or higher).
Basic Model QCPUs, Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs, Safety CPUs, and Remote I/O Stations are not
compatible.

68
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

6.4 Utilize existing A (Large Type) and AnS (Small Type) modules without
changing I/O addresses
Solution and Benefit
• The I/O addresses do not need to be changed when reutilizing existing A Series modules with Q
Series CPU and mounting the modules on QA6�B/A6�B+QA6ADP. This can greatly reduce
program modification time.
• The A (Large Type) and AnS (Small Type) modules can be used with the same I/O addresses, so
there is no need to change the external wiring numbers.

The following is an example of how to reuse the program without modifying the I/O addresses when replacing the
CPU with a Q Series CPU and keeping the existing I/O modules on a QA extension base unit.

A. I/O assignment example


When utilizing existing A (Large Type) and AnS (Small Type) modules with the Q Series CPU, set the existing
module’s I/O addresses to the existing addresses with the PC parameter I/O assignment settings. Assign the
addresses for the modules mounted onto the main base unit after the existing module. This will greatly reduce
program modification time.

B. System configuration example (same as in 6.1)

Current configuration New configuration


Q06UDHCPU

QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N

QJ71BR11

Empty

Empty
Q61P
AJ71E71N3-T

Q35B
A68DAI-S1

AJ71BR11
AJ61BT11
A3NCPU

A68AD

A68AD
A61P

AX41

Replace
AY10

Modules replacing
the A Series

A38B
A68DAI-S1
A68AD

A68AD
Empty

Empty

Empty
A61P

AX41

AY10

QC06B
QA68B

Existing A Series Slots left empty becase


modules these modules are replaced
with the Q Series

69
6. Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

C. Parameter setting example

Model Type Point Address


0 QJ61BT11N Intelli 32 100
1 QJ71BR11 Intelli 32 120
Main base unit
2 QJ71E71-100 Intelli 32 140
(Q38B)
3 - Empty 16 160
4 - Empty 16 170

Model Type Point Address


5 AX41 Input 32 00
6 - Empty 32 20
7 AY10 Output 16 40
Extesion base unit 8 A68AD Intelli 32 50
(QA68B) 9 A68AD Intelli 32 70
10 A68DAI-S1 Intelli 32 90
11 - Empty 32 B0
12 - Empty 32 D0

Tip
• Assign the I/O numbers in the following order: Q Series to A Series or A Series to Q Series.
• When the order is mixed (i.e., Q Series A Series Q Series), the CPU does not start up due to an error.

70
MEMO

71
7. Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

7. Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link


7.1 Replace A2CCPU with Q Series CPU and CC-Link
(using A2C shape CC-Link I/O modules)
Solution and Benefit
• A2C shape CC-Link remote I/O modules have been developed to replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3)
systems with CC-Link. Wiring time is reduced because existing terminal blocks can be mounted
directly on the A2C shape CC-Link remote I/O module by merely changing the communication
and power lines.
• Since the mounting size is the same as that of A2C I/O modules, the new modules can be
mounted using existing holes.

The following is an example of replacing an A2CCPU with a Q Series CPU and A2C I/O modules with A2C
shape CC-Link remote I/O modules.

A. Instructions
(1) Replace the stand alone A2CCPU with the building block type Q Series CPU.
(2) Replace the A2C I/O modules with the A2C shape CC-Link remote I/O modules while maintaining
the distributed I/O system.
(3) Change the communication cables with CC-Link dedicated cables, and rewire the power cables.

B. System configuration example


X40 to 4F
Current configuration X00 to 1F Y20 to 3F Y50 to 5F
AX40
AX41C AY13C Y10C
A2CCPU

X60 to 6F
XA0 to BF Y80 to 9F Y70 to 7F
AX40
AX41C AY13C Y10C

New configuration
Replace
Q00UCPU

QJ61BT11N*1

Empty

Empty
Q61P

*1: Because the master module occupies 32 points, program modifications are needed.
(Device numbers set for auto refresh in the network parameter setting)
Q33B

AJ65DBTB1-32D AJ65DBTB1-32D AJ65DBTB1-32DR

AJ65DBTB1-32R AJ65DBTB1-32R AJ65DBTB1-32DR

C. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module N/A - Q61P 1
CPU module A2CCPU 1 Q00UCPU 1
Main base unit N/A - Q33B 1
Master module N/A - QJ61BT11N 1
Input module AX41C 2 AJ65DBTB1-32D 2
Output module AY13C 2 AJ65DBTB1-32R 2
I/O combined module AX40Y10C 2 AJ65DBTB1-32DR 2

72
7. Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

D. A2C shape CC-Link remote I/O modules


CC-Link remote I/O modules are available in the same shape and size as some of the A2C I/O modules to
facilitate transition. New mounting holes are unnecessary and existing wiring can be utilized with minor
modifications.

After replacing the module,


mount the wired terminal block.*1

Remove the wired


terminal block
from the existing
I/O module.

*1: The communication lines and power lines need to be rewired.

(1) Model list


Alternative model
Model to be discontinued
Model Outline
AX41C Terminal block type, 24 V DC input, 32 points,
AJ65DBTB1-32D
AX81C sink/source
Terminal block type, 0.5 A transistor output,
AY51C AJ65DBTB1-32T1
32 points, sink
Terminal block type, 24 V DC input, 16 points,
AX40Y50C AJ65DBTB1-32DT1
0.5 A transistor output, 16 points, I/O composite module

AX40Y10C AJ65DBTB1-32R Terminal block type, relay output, 32 points

Terminal block type, 24 V DC input, sink/source shared,


AX80Y10C AJ65DBTB1-32DR
16 points, relay output, 16 points, composite module

Tip
•The A2C shape CC-Link remote I/O modules can also replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) systems consisting
of the AJ71PT32(-S)/A1SJ71PT32(-S3) building block type master module with CC-Link.
In this case, program modification is not required.
• For replacing compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link modules, refer to Section 5.3 "Replace
MELSECNET/MIN compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link using A0J2 renewal tool".

73
7. Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

7.2 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link (using wiring conversion adapter)


Solution and Benefit
By selecting modules with equivalent specifications, existing external wiring can be utilized when
replacing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) systems with CC-Link.

The following is an example of replacing a MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) system with CC-Link using a wiring
conversion adapter.

A. Instructions
(1) Remove the terminal blocks from existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) I/O modules, install them in the wiring
conversion adapters, and then mount them on the selected CC-Link remote I/O modules.
(2) Change the MELSECNET/MINI communication cables with CC-Link dedicated cables, and rewire
the power cables.

B. System configuration example


Current configuration
A2SHCPU
A1S61PN

A1SJ71PT32-S3

A1SX42

A1SX42

A1SY42

A1SY41

AJ35TB1-16D AJ35TB2-16D AJ35TB1-16T


(16 points) (16 points) (16 points)
Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block
A1S35B
To power To power To power
MELSECNET/MINI supply, supply, supply,
(Twisted pair cable) To I/O To I/O To I/O

CC-Link I/O module

Replace
Wiring conversion
adapter

New configuration
A2SHCPU
A1S61PN

Existing
A1SJ61BT11

A1SX42

A1SX42

A1SY42

A1SY41

MELSECNET/MINI
terminal block

*1
A1S35B
Replace the link
module AJ65BTB1-16D AJ65BTB2-16D AJ65BTB1-16T
CC-Link dedicated cable (16 points) (16 points) (16 points)

A6ADP-1MC16D A6ADP-2MC16D A6ADP-1MC16T


Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block
To power To power To power
supply, supply, supply,
To I/O To I/O To I/O

*1
*1: Terminating resistor

74
7. Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

C. Module selection example

Product name Existing model Replacement model


MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) master module A1SJ71PT32-S3 1 N/A -
CC-Link master module N/A - A1SJ61BT11 1
AJ35TB1-16D 1 AJ65BTB1-16D 1
Remote input module
AJ35TB2-16D 1 AJ65BTB2-16D 1
Remote output module AJ35TB1-16T 1 AJ65BTB1-16T 1
N/A - A6ADP-1MC16D (for AJ65BTB1-16D) 1
Wiring conversion adapter N/A - A6ADP-2MC16D (for AJ65BTB2-16D) 1
N/A - A6ADP-1MC16T (for AJ65BTB1-16T) 1

D. Model list

Model to be discontinued Alternative model


Product Model
Model Remarks (restrictions)
name Alternative model Conversion adapter

AJ35TB1-16D AJ65BTB1-16D 26-pin conversion adapter*1


A6ADP-1MC16D *1: The overall size is increased
Input due to addition of the adapter
module to the alternative module.
AJ35TB2-16D AJ65BTB2-16D 34-pin conversion adapter*1
A6ADP-2MC16D *2: Additional wiring to CTL+
(External power supply
Output 26-pin conversion adapter*1, *2 for output) is required.
AJ35TB1-16T AJ65BTB1-16T
module A6ADP-1MC16T

Tip
• MELSECNET/MINI occupies 8 points/station whereas CC-Link occupies 32 points/station. Therefore, except
for modules with a total of 32 points (occupying 4 stations), I/O numbers need to be changed and program
modifications are required.
• The communication cables must be changed to the CC-Link dedicated cables.
• Specifications differ depending on the alternative model. Refer to “Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3,
A2C (I/O) to CC-Link Handbook” L(NA)08061ENG for details.
190˚
• Due to the wiring conversion adapter, the external dimensions
Increased depth
increased by 5.1 mm (height) and 28.5 mm (depth).
Depth of sticking
28.5

out part
(terminal block)

Depth of CC-Link
I/O module
46

Increased height
Mounting face
5.1 65

Unit: mm

75
7. Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

7.3 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) remote I/O station (building block type: AJ72PT35)
with MELSECNET/H using the existing external wiring
Solution and Benefit
• MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) can utilize Q Series large type base unit. Wiring time can be
reduced by utilizing the external wiring of MELSECNET/MINI remote I/O station, which consists of
existing building block type I/O modules.
• Program modification is not required because the number of occupied points are the same for
each I/O module to be replaced. Therefore, programming time and debugging time after the
replacement is reduced.

A. Instructions
(1) Replace the existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network).
Install new network cables: optical cable (loop) or coaxial cable (bus).
(Optical cables are used for the following example.)
(2) When the I/O module of the existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) remote I/O station is of terminal block type,
utilize the existing terminal block with the external wiring through a Q Series large type base unit and the
following products.
• Q Series large type I/O modules
• Q Series I/O modules + upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
(3) In MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) network parameter, set the master station side devices to be the
same as the ones assigned to the existing MELSECNET/MINI in order to avoid program modification.

B. System configuration example

Current configuration New configuration

A35B MELSECNET/MINI master station Q35B Remote I/O network master station
AJ71PT32-S3

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
QJ71LP21
Q02U
CPU
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
A2ACPU

Q61P

-25
A61P

MELSECNET/H remote
MELSECNET/MINI I/O network (optical loop)
data link system
Remote I/O station: Station number 1
A35B Station number:1 Number of occupied points: 16 Q35BL QG69L

QX41 QY41
QJ72LP25

Replace
ERTN-AQTX

ERTN-AQTY
AJ72PT35

Q61P

QY13L
Empty

QX11L

Empty
-25
A61P

AX41
AX11

AY13

AY41

41

41

Existing Existing Existing Existing


terminal terminal terminal terminal
Station number:17 Number of occupied points: 16 block block block block
A32B
Remote I/O station: Station number 2
Q33B
AJ72PT35

QJ72LP25
A61P

AX42

AY42

Empty
QX42
Q61P

QY42
-25

Existing Existing
connector connector

76
7. Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

C. Network parameter setting example


The following example shows the network parameter settings of MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) after
replacement in the case where the transmission devices of the existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) network were
X/Y100 to 1FF.

(1) Existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) (2) MELSECNET/H after replacement


Auto refresh parameter Network parameter (common parameter)

Network range assignment

D. Module selection example


(1) Master station
Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2ACPU 1 Q02UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35B 1
AJ71PT32-S3 QJ71LP21-25
Master module 1 1
*For MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) *For MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

(2) Remote I/O station: Station number 1


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
AJ72PT35 QJ72LP25-25
Data link/Network module 1 1
*For MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) *For MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
AX11 1 QX11L 1
QX41 1
Input module
AX41 1 ERTN-AQTX41 1
QG69L 1
AY13 1 QY13L 1
QY41 1
Output module
AY41 1 ERTN-AQTY41 1
QG69L 1

77
7. Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

(3) Remote I/O station: Station number 2

Product name Existing model Replacement model


Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
Main base unit A32B 1 Q33B 1
AJ72PT35 QJ72LP25-25
Data link/Network module 1 1
*For MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) *For MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Input module AX42 1 QX42 1
Output module AY42 1 QY42 1

Tip
•The installation of MELSECNET/MINI twisted pair cables needs to be modified according to the upgraded
network. In the example, optical dual loop is selected to loop the network. When the distance between
stations or overall distance is short, a coaxial bus cable can be used to reduce cable installation time.
• Some CPUs, such as Basic Model QCPUs (Q00J, Q00, Q01CPU), cannot be set as MELSECNET/H
(remote I/O network) master station.
For selecting CPU type, refer to "Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
(Remote I/O network)" SH-080124.
• If modules other than building type I/O modules, such as A2C I/O modules, are mixed in the existing
MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) system, the entire system cannot be upgraded to MELSECNET/H (remote I/O
network).
In this case, consider separating the system into MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) and CC-Link.
(Replacement by dividing a network)

78
MEMO

79
8. Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

8. Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10


8.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) coaxial loop with MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system
while retaining existing A Series CPUs
Solution and Benefit
• When an existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) system consists of many stations, the complete network
system can be upgraded to MELSECNET/10 while reusing existing cable installations.
• By upgrading the entire network at once, the current network parameter settings can be used.
• Once the network is updated, A Series stations can be replaced with the Q Series in any order
until all the stations are upgraded to the Q Series.

The following is an example of replacing a MELSECNET(ΙΙ) coaxial loop system's master station with a Q Series
system and upgrading the network to a MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system.

A. Instructions
(1) Replace one of the MELSECNET(ΙΙ) stations with the Q Series.
(2) Replace the complete MELSECNET(ΙΙ) system with MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system.
(3) Replace the CPU of each station with Q Series CPU sequentially, and eventually replace all CPUs with Q
Series CPUs.
(4) Use the existing settings for the network parameters.
B. System configuration example
Current configuration Transitional step 1
Master station Control station
QJ71BR11
I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Power supply

A2NCPUR21

Q02U
CPU
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

Q61P
Empty
module

NET/10 (Coaxial bus) R


NET/ΙΙ (Coaxial loop)
A2NCPUR21

A2NCPUR21
Power supply

Power supply

AJ71BR11
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Empty
module

module

A1SJ71BR11
A1SJ71AR21
Power supply

Power supply

Initial Second
A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

replacement replacement
module

module
Power supply

Power supply
A2NCPUR21

A2NCPUR21

AJ71BR11
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Empty
module

module
Power supply

Power supply
A2NCPUR21

A2NCPUR21

AJ71BR11
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Empty
module

module

80
8. Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

Tip
Unless the existing network is in MELSECNET mode or MELSECNET(ΙΙ) mode and only the first half is set,
the network parameter settings need to be changed. In MELSECNET(ΙΙ) mode or MELSECNET(ΙΙ) composite
mode, if the second half settings exist, it is necessary to reset the B/W of each station's send range and set the
station inherent parameters.
Furthermore, when AnNCPUs, AnACPUs or AnSCPUs are part of the system, the program should be modified
because station inherent parameters cannot be set.
For precautions for the existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) system configuration, refer to “Transition from
MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Network Modules)”.

Transitional step 2 Transition completed

Control station Control station


QJ71BR11

QJ71BR11
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Q02U

Q02U
CPU

CPU
Q61P

Q61P

R R
QJ71BR11
I/O mdule

I/O mdule
A2NCPUR21

AJ71BR11
Power supply

Q02U
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

CPU
Q61P
module

QJ71BR11

QJ71BR11
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Q01U

Q01U

Final
CPU

CPU
Q61P

Q61P

replacement
QJ71BR11
I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Power supply

Q02U
A2NCPUR21

AJ71BR11

CPU
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

Q61P
module

QJ71BR11

QJ71BR11
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Q02U

Q02U
CPU

CPU
Q61P

Q61P

R R

81
8. Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

8.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H network system utilizing existing MELSECNET/B


twisted pair cable
Solution and Benefit
When replacing A Series CPU with Q Series CPU in a MELSECNET/B data link system, the network
can be effortlessly updated to twisted bus type MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) because the
existing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable can be directly utilized. (New cable installation is not
required.)

The following is an example of replacing MELSECNET/B with twisted bus type MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC
network) utilizing the existing twisted pair cable.
A. Instructions
(1) Replace all A Series CPUs found in the existing MELSECNET/B system with Q Series CPUs.
(2) Utilize the existing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable.
(3) Modify the terminals of the network modules because the cable connection method has been changed from
screw terminal block type to spring clamp terminal block type.

B. System configuration example

Current configuration Existing MELSECNET/B (ACPU+AJ71AT21B)

Master station Local station Local station

Upgrade to Q Series modules


Replace

New configuration MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)(QCPU+QJ71NT11B)

Control station Normal station Normal station

* The existing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable and terminating resistor are utilized.
(Terminal modification is required.)

82
8. Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

C. Specifications of MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)


The following table shows the specifications of twisted bus type MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network).
MELSECNET/H(PLC to PLC network)Twisted bus type
Item
QJ71NT11B
LX/LY 8192 points
Maximum number of
LB 16384 points
link points per network
LW 16384 points
Maximum number of link •MELSECNET/H mode {(LY + LB) / 8 + (2 + LW)} ≤ 2000 bytes
points per station •MELSECNET/H Extended mode {(LY + LB) / 8 + (2 + LW)} ≤ 35840 bytes
156 kbps/312 kbps/625 kbps/1.25 Mbps/2.5 Mbps/5 Mbps/10 Mbps
Communication speed
(Switched by network parameters)
Number of stations per network Up to 32 stations (1 control station, 31 normal stations)
Connection cable Twisted pair cable or CC-Link Ver.1.10-compatible cable

Communication speed Twisted pair cable CC-Link Ver.1.10-compatible cable


156 kbps 1200 m 1200 m
312 kbps 600 m 900 m
625 kbps 400 m 600 m
Overall distance for one network
1.25 Mbps 200 m 400 m
2.5 Mbps 200 m
-
5 Mbps 150 m
(Not applicable)
10 Mbps 100 m

D. Usable twisted pair cable for twisted bus type (Same specifications as those of MELSECNET/B)
The following table shows the specifications of twisted pair cable that can be used for twisted bus type
MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)*.
Item KNPEV-SB 0.5SQ x 1P (Applicable only when the communication speed is 1.25Mbps or less.)

Blue
Cross section
White

Cable Shielded twisted pair cable


Core 2-core
Conductor resistance (20˚C) 39.4 /km or less
Insulation resistance (20˚C) 10 M/km or more
Dielectric withstand voltage V-min 1000 V AC 1 minute
Capacitance (1 KHz) 70 nF/km or less on average
Characteristic impedance (100 KHz) 110 ± 10 Ω

* The cable terminal (the part where it connects to the module) is a bar solderless terminal.
When utilizing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable, solderless terminals need to be changed
to bar solderless terminals. For details on the bar solderless terminal and tools dedicated to it,
refer to "Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
(PLC to PLC network)": SH-080049.

83
8. Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

Tip
• MELSECNET/H (twisted bus type) is compatible with Q Series CPUs only.
All A Series CPUs connected to the existing MELSECNET/B need to be upgraded to Q Series CPUs at once.
• MELSECNET/H (twisted bus type) is compatible with PLC to PLC network only. It is not compatible with
remote I/O network.
To replace MELSECNET/B with MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network), use optical loop system or coaxial
bus system.
Or, replace MELSECNET/B with MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) and remote I/O stations with normal
stations. (Refer to Chapter 9)
• For details on Q Series CPU type to which MELSECNET/H network module (twisted bus type: QJ71NT11B)
can be mounted, number of mountable modules per CPU, and network parameter settings, refer to the
following manual.
"Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)" : SH-080049
• MELSECNET/H (twisted bus type) can use CC-Link cables. The maximum communication speed of the
network is 10 Mbps.

84
MEMO

85
9. Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H

9. Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H


Solution and Benefit
• Although MELSECNET systems may be a combination of local and remote I/O stations, two
separate networks are necessary when upgrading to Q Series. However, if the existing system
contains only a few remote I/O stations, only one network is needed if remote I/O stations are
replaced with normal (local) stations without changing the cable layout or adding new wiring.
• Even when the remote I/O stations are replaced with the normal stations, it is not required to
modify the control (master) station’s network related programs.

The following is an example of upgrading a MELSECNET(ΙΙ) system to MELSECNET/H by replacing both local
and remote I/O stations with normal stations.

A. Instructions
(1) Replace the MELSECNET(ΙΙ) master station with the MELSECNET/H control station, and the
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local and remote I/O stations with the MELSECNET/H normal stations to maintain a single
network configuration. (This is because the controller network and remote I/O network cannot reside on a
single network.)
(2) Add a simple transfer program between LX/LY (link side device) and X/Y (actual I/O device) for the normal
station replaced from the remote I/O station. With this program, the normal station receives LY sent from
the control station by X and transfers it to actual output address Y; the normal station transfers input X to LY
so that the control station can receive it as X.
• MELSECNET(ΙΙ): I/O signal transfer between master station and remote station
- Master station input (X) <- Remote station input (X)
- Master station output (Y) -> Remote station output (Y)
• MELSECNET/H: I/O signal transfer between control station and normal station
- Control station input (X) <- Normal station output (Y)
- Control station output (Y) -> Normal station input (X)

86
Q61P Q61P Q61P Power supply Power supply Power supply
module module module
Q06UDH Q06UDH Q06UDH
CPU CPU CPU A3USHCPU-S1 A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUP21

New configuration
Current configuration

I/O mdule I/O mdule QJ71LP21-25


Master station
I/O mdule I/O mdule I/O mdule
I/O mdule I/O mdule I/O mdule
I/O mdule I/O mdule I/O mdule

Local station: Station 2


Local station: Station 1
I/O mdule I/O mdule I/O mdule

Nomal station: Station 2


Nomal station: Station 1
Control station: Station 5
I/O mdule I/O mdule I/O mdule
I/O mdule I/O mdule I/O mdule
B. System configuration example

I/O mdule I/O mdule I/O mdule


QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21-25 I/O mdule

A1SJ71AP21 I/O mdule I/O mdule

MELSECNET/H optical loop


MELSECNET(ΙΙ) optical loop

87
Replace
Q61P Q61P Power supply Power supply
module module
Q02U Q06UDH
CPU CPU AJ72P25 A3ACPUP21

I/O mdule I/O mdule


I/O mdule I/O mdule
I/O mdule I/O mdule
I/O mdule I/O mdule
Local station: Station 4

I/O mdule I/O mdule

Nomal station: Station 4


I/O mdule I/O mdule

Normal station: Station 3


Remote station: Station 3

I/O mdule I/O mdule

I/O mdule I/O mdule


QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21-25

(replacement of remote I/O station)


I/O mdule I/O mdule
9. Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H
9. Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H

C. Network parameter modification example


(1) Parameter settings for existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) master station

LBLW Setting

L/R Trans range Trans range M sta -> R sta M sta <- R sta
Station No. LB LW LW LW
Start End Start End Start End Start End
M [ 0] - [ FF] [ 0] - [ FF]
[L] 1 [ 100] - [ 1FF] [ 100] - [ 1FF]
[L] 2 [ 200] - [ 2FF] [ 200] - [ 2FF]
[R] 3 [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]
[L] 4 [ 300] - [ 3FF] [ 300] - [ 3FF]

LXLY Setting

L/R M sta -> L/R sta M sta -> L/R sta


Station No. LY LX/LY LX LX/LY
Start End Start End Start End Start End
M
[L] 1 [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]
[L] 2 [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]
[R] 3 [ 500] - [ 5FF] [ 0] - [ FF] [ 500] - [ 5FF] [ 0] - [ FF]
[L] 4 [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]

(2) Parameter settings for MELSECNET/H control station


(a) MELSECNET/Ethernet network parameter settings
Mdl. 1 Mdl. 2 Mdl. 3 Mdl. 4
Network type MNET/H mode(Ctr Sta)
Start I/O No. 0100
Network No. 1
Total stations 5
Group No. 0
Station No. ----------
Mode Online
Network range alloc.set.exist
No sta.inher.para.settings
Refresh para. settings exist
No interrupt settings

88
9. Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H

(b) Network range assignment


LB/LW Settings
Trans range Trans range Trans range Trans range
Pairing
LB LW Low speed LB Low speed LW
Station No. Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End
1 256 0100 01FF 256 0100 01FF Disable
2 256 0200 02FF 256 0200 02FF Disable
3 Disable
4 256 0300 03FF 256 0300 03FF Disable
Master1 5 16 0000 000F 256 0000 00FF Disable

LX/LY Settings (1)


Trans range Trans range
LY LX LX LY
Station No. Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End
1
2
3 256 0500 05FF 256 0500 05FF 256 0500 05FF 256 0500 05FF
4
Master1 5 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

(c) Refresh parameters

Link side PLC side

Points Start End Points Start End

SB Transfer 512 SB0000 SB01FF <--> 512 SB0000 SB01FF

SW Transfer 512 SW0000 SW01FF <--> 512 SW0000 SW01FF

Transfer 1 8192 LB0000 LB1FFF <--> 8192 B0 B1FFF

Transfer 2 8192 LW0000 LW1FFF <--> 8192 W0 W1FFF

Transfer 3 256 LX0500 LX05FF <--> 256 X500 X5FF

Transfer 4 256 LY0500 LY05FF <--> 256 Y500 Y5FF

89
9. Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H

(3) Parameter settings and link data transfer program for the normal station replaced from the remote I/O station
(a) MELSECNET/Ethernet network parameter settings
Mdl. 1 Mdl. 2 Mdl. 3 Mdl. 4
Network type MNET/H mode(Nor Sta)
Start I/O No. 0100
Network No. 1
Total stations ----------
Group No. 0
Station No. ----------
Mode Online
----------
No sta.inher.para.settings
Refresh para. settings exist
No interrupt settings
----------
----------
----------
----------
----------

(b) Refresh parameters

Link side PLC side

Points Start End Points Start End

SB Transfer 512 SB0000 SB01FF <--> 512 SB0000 SB01FF

SW Transfer 512 SW0000 SW01FF <--> 512 SW0000 SW01FF

Transfer 1 256 LX0500 LX05FF <--> 256 X500 X5FF

Transfer 2 256 LY0500 LY05FF <--> 256 Y500 Y5FF

(c) Transfer program between link data (LX/LY) and actual I/O (X/Y)

SM400
0 BMOV K4X500 K4Y0 K16
Always ON Control Host
station station
receive output module
data start address
BMOV K4X0 K4Y500 K16
Host Control
station station
input module receive
start address data
9 END

90
MEMO

91
10. Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

10. Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
Solution and Benefit
• Using a local station data link module, the Q Series can directly connect to existing
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) network as a local station. Existing wiring can be utilized, and network parameter
modification is not required.
• Local station data link modules for optical fiber loop, coaxial loop, and MELSECNET/B are
provided to support all types of existing networks.

10.1 Replace A Series local station with Q Series


The following is an example of replacing one of A Series local stations with the Q Series.

A. Instructions
Replace the CPU and other modules on one of the A Series local stations with the Q Series, and mount the
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module on the QA1S6�B extension base unit.
B. System configuration example
Current configuration New configuration
Master station Master station
Power supply

Power supply
A3ACPUP21

A3ACPUP21
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
No change
module

module MELSECNET(ΙΙ) optical loop


MELSECNET(ΙΙ) optical loop Local station 1
Q03UD
CPU

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Local station 1
Q61P

Q38B
Power supply

A3ACPUP21

Replace QC�B
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
module

A1SJ71AP
A1S61PN

Empty

Empty

Empty
23Q

QA1S65B

Local station 2
Local station 2
Power supply

A2ACPUP21

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Power supply

A2ACPUP21

No change
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

module
module

(including optical fiber cables)

Local station 3 Local station 3


I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
Q02U
CPU
Q61P
Power supply

Replace
A2NCPUP21

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
module

Q38B
QC06B
A1SJ71AP
23Q

QA1S51B
92
10. Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

C. Module selection example


(Local station 1)
Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A3ACPUP21 1 Q03UDCPU 1
Main base unit A38B 1 Q38B 1
Input module AX� — QX� —
Output module AY� — QY� —
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module Embedded in CPU module 1 A1SJ71AP23Q 1
Extension base (for A1S Series module) — — QA1S65B 1
Extension Power supply module
— — A1S61PN 1
(for A1S Series module)
Extension cable — — QC06B 1

(Local station 3)
Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2Ncpu21 1 Q02UCPU 1
Main base unit A38B 1 Q38B 1
Input module AX�� — QX�� —
Output module AY�� — QY�� —
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module Embedded in CPU module — A1SJ71AP23Q 1
Extension base (for A1S Series module) — — QA1S51B*1*2 1
Extension cable — — QC06B 1
*1: QA1S51B is an extension base that does not require a power supply, so if the extension cable is long, a voltage drop could
prevent the specified voltage from being supplied. Always calculate the voltage drop.
*2: QA1S51B only has an IN type extension connector, so it will be the extension final stage. QA6�B (Large Type) extension base
cannot be connected below QA1S51B.t

D. Local station data link module options


Model Outline
A1SJ71AP23Q MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module for SI optical fiber cable
A1SJ71AR23Q MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module for coaxial cable
A1SJ71AT23BQ MELSECNET/B local station data link module for shielded twisted pair cable

Tip
• Except for the local station replaced with the Q Series, modification to the system configuration and programs
are not required.
• Minimal setup is required, as network parameter settings (excluding link refresh setting) are automatically
detected by the local station data link module. FROM/TO instructions within sequence program (refresh
program) are required to enable send/receive cyclic data.
A sample program to enable send/receive of cyclic data can be created by "A/QnA -> Q conversion support
tool". (Refer to Chapter 17)
• If slots are left empty in the replacement Q Series CPU after connecting the A (Large Type) extension base
onto which the QA6�B extension base unit or QA conversion adapter QA6ADP is connected, the
MELSECNET(II), /B local station data link module can be connected using the A-A1S conversion adapter.
QA1S6�B or QA1S51B do not need to be additionally selected in this case.

93
10. Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

10.2 Replace A Series master station with Q Series


The following is an example of replacing the A Series master station with Q Series.

A. Instructions
(1) Replace the CPU and other modules on the master station with Q Series while maintaining the existing
network, and mount the MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module on the QA1S6�B extension base unit.
(2) Since a Q Series station cannot be the master station, set Local station 1 as the master station, set the link
parameters, and change the station number of the rest of the local stations.
(3) Utilize the existing optical fiber cables.

B. System configuration example

Current configuration New configuration


Master station
Local station 3
Power supply

Q02H
A3ACPUP21

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
CPU
Q61P
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

Replace
module

Q38B
QC�B

A1SJ71AP
A1S61PN

Empty

Empty

Empty
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) optical loop

23Q
QA1S65B

MELSECNET(ΙΙ) optical loop

Local station 1 Master station


Power supply

Power supply
A3ACPUP21

A3ACPUP21
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
module

module

Local station 2 Local station 1


Power supply

Power supply
A2ACPUP21

A2ACPUP21

No change
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
module

module

(including optical fiber cables)

Local station 3 Local station 2


Power supply

Power supply
A2NCPUP21

A2NCPUP21
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
module

module

Note: In MELSECNET(II) mode and MELSECNET(II) composite mode, only AnA, AnU, or QnA CPU can be used
for the master station.

94
10. Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

C. Module selection example

Product name Existing model Replacement model


Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A3ACPUP21 1 Q02HCPU 1
Main base unit A38B 1 Q38B 1
Input module AX� — QX� —
Output module AY� — QY� —
MELSECNET(Ⅱ) local station data link module Embedded in CPU module 1 A1SJ71AP23Q 1
Extension base (for A1S Series module) — — QA1S65B 1
Extension Power supply module
— — A1S61PN 1
(for A1S Series module)
Extension cable — — QC06B 1

D. Link parameter settings (MELSECNET(ΙΙ) composite mode)

Send range (first half) Send range (second half) Station No. Send range (first half) Send range (second half)
Station No.
Points Start End Points Start End Current New Points Start End Points Start End
M0 256 000 0FF 256 500 5FF L1II M0 256 100 1FF 256 600 6FF
Replace
L1II 256 100 1FF 256 600 6FF L2II L1II 256 200 2FF 256 700 7FF
L2II 256 200 2FF 256 700 7FF L3 L2 256 300 3FF - - -
L3 256 300 3FF - - - M0 L3II 256 000 0FF 256 500 5FF

Tip
• The data link module was designed for local stations and cannot be set as master station. For this reason, a
local station that is upgraded to Q Series cannot become the master station. Instead, one of the existing A
Series local stations should be set as the master station. The station numbers should be changed
accordingly, but the I/O address and parameters can remain the same.
• Minimal setup is required, as network parameter settings (excluding link refresh setting) are automatically
detected by the local station data link module. FROM/TO instructions within sequence program (refresh
program) are required to enable send/receive cyclic data.
• A sample program to enable send/receive of cyclic data can be created by "A/QnA -> Q conversion support
tool". (Refer to Chapter 17)
• For MELSECNET(Ⅱ), the station numbers must be assigned in the connecting order starting from the new
master station.
• The QA1S51B extension base without power supply module can be used for the local station data link
module mounting base.
Note that the voltage drop must be calculated if the extension cable is long.

95
11. Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

11. Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules


Solution and Benefit
Q Series replacement dedicated modules share the same input filtering system as, and therefore
can replace the A Series high-speed counter module AD61 or AD61S1 without restrictions from the
specifications of existing pulse generators (e.g. an encoder).

A. Instructions
Replace A Series high-speed counter modules with the following Q Series modules (replacement dedicated
module).
• AD61 -> QD62-H01
• AD61S1 -> QD62-H02

B. System configuration example

Current configuration
Power supply

I/O signals
CPU module
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
AD61S1

Buffer memory read/write


module
ACPU

ACPU
AD61

Counting range
AD61(S1) 24-bit unsigned binary
Pulse
Pulse generator (0 to 16,777,215)

Encoder Counting speed


(50/10/7 KPPS)
External control signal CH1 Coincidence signal output (1 point)
Controller
[Preset]

Pulse
Pulse generator

Encoder Counting speed


(50/10/7 KPPS) CH2 Coincidence signal output (1 point)
External control signal
Controller
[Preset]

Replace Same input


filtering system

New configuration

I/O signals
QCPU
Power supply

CPU module
I/O mdule

I/O mdule

I/O mdule
QD62

QD62
-H01

-H02

Buffer memory read/write


module

QCPU (Q Mode)

QD62 Counting range


Pulse -H01/02 32-bit signed binary
Pulse generator (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
Encoder Counting speed
(50/10/7 KPPS)
Connector/terminal block

External control signal CH1 Coincidence signal output (2 points)


Controller
Preset
converter module

Counter function
Cable

selection
Pulse
Pulse generator

Encoder Counting speed


(50/10/7 KPPS) CH2 Coincidence signal output (2 points)
External control signal
Controller
Preset
Counter function
selection

96
11. Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

C. Module wiring
The external wiring method is different between AD61/AD61S1 and QD62-H01/QD62-H02.
• AD61, AD61S1: Use a terminal block
• QD62-H01, QD62-H02: Use a connector
The following are replacement methods in which existing wiring are preserved.
(1) Replacement using a conversion adapter manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
The existing modules' terminal blocks and wiring can be utilized. For replacement details, refer to the
following section.
• Chapter 3. Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

97
11. Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

(2) Replacement using a connector/terminal block converter module


This replacement method is suitable when the Q Series large type base unit and conversion adapter
manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. cannot be used due to system configuration and
installation location restrictions.
Connect the input/output wires, which include solderless terminals, from the existing module to the
connector/terminal block converter module using a dedicated cable. This connection is not restricted by
differences in wiring size.
The following shows the wiring configuration when using a connector/terminal block converter module.

Connector Terminal
Signal name terminal block side
number terminal number
Phase A pulse input 24 V A20 10
Phase A pulse input 12 V B20 0

QD62-H01
Phase A pulse input 5 V A19 11
øA
øB
DEC. ABCOM B19 1
FUNC. FUSE

Phase B pulse input 24 V A18 12


CH1 CH2

Phase B pulse input 12 V B18 2


Phase B pulse input 5 V A17 13
Preset input 24 V B17 3
CH1 Preset input 12 V A16 14
Preset input 5 V B16 4
CTRLCOM A15 15
Function start input 24 V B15 5
Function start input 12 V A14 16
QD62-H01 Function start input 5 V B14 6
EQU 1
(Coincidence output point No.1) A06 1E
Cable
AC05TB EQU 2
AC10TB
(Coincidence output point No.2) B06 E
AC20TB
AC30TB
AC50TB
Phase A pulse input 24 V A13 17
AC80TB Phase A pulse input 12 V B13 7
Connector/terminal block
AC100TB
converter module
Phase A pulse input 5 V A12 18
A6TBXY36
ABCOM B12 8
Phase B pulse input 24 V A11 19
Phase B pulse input 12 V B11 9
Phase B pulse input 5 V A10 1A
Preset input 24 V B10 A
Preset input 12 V A09 1B
CH2
Preset input 5 V B09 B
CTRLCOM A08 1C
Function start input 24 V B08 C
Function start input 12 V A07 1D
Function start input 5 V B07 D
EQU 1
(Coincidence output point No.1) A05 1F

EQU 2
(Coincidence output point No.2) B05 F

B02
12/24 V B01 24 V

A02
0V A01 0V

98
11. Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

Tip
• The input filtering system and counting speed of replacement Q Series dedicated modules QD62-H01 and
QD62-H02 are the same as those of existing A Series high-speed counter modules AD61 and AD61S1.
High-speed counter modules can be replaced without being restrained by the specifications of existing pulse
generators (e.g. an encoder).
• AD61/AD61S1 and QD62-H01/QD62-H02 have different counting ranges. Modify the program in order to use
the same counting range as that of the module before replacement.
• AD61, AD61S1: 0 to 16,777,215 (24-bit unsigned binary)
• QD62-H01, QD62-H02: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (32-bit signed binary)
• The number of points occupied by the module changes from 32 to16 points, and thus the I/O signal
assignment (X/Y) also changes. Due to additional functions, the buffer memory addresses are changed and
program modification is necessary. Check the specification at "High-Speed Counter Module User's Manual":
SH-080036, and modify the program.

99
11. Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

D. Comparison of specification between AD61 and QD62-H01 ○: Compatible, △: Partial change required
Item AD61 QD62-H01 Compatibility Precautions for replacement

32 points 16 points
Occupied I/O points △ *1
(I/O assignment: special 32 points) (I/O assignment: Intelligent 16 points)

Number of channels 2 channel ○

Counting speed Set “2” at the intelligent function


- 50 KPPS ○
switch settings module switch setting.

Phase 1-phase input, 2-phase input ○


Count
input Signal level 5 V DC
signal 12 V DC 2 to 5 mA ○
(φA, φB)
24 V DC
Counting 1-phase input 50 KPPS 1-phase input 50 KPPS
speed ○ *2
(Max.) 2-phase input 50 KPPS 2-phase input 50 KPPS
On QD62-H01, as the value is used
Counting 24-bit unsigned binary 32-bit signed binary values
△ with 32-bit signed binary values,
range (0 to 16, 777, 215) (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
change of sequence program is required.
Perfomance specifications of 1 channels

Counter Type UP/DOWN preset counter + ring counter function ○

Minimum 20 μs
count pulse
width
(set input rise ○
time to 5 μs or
less. Duty ratio: 10 μs 10 μs
50%) (1, 2-phase input)

Magnitude Comparison
range 24-bit unsigned binary 32-bit signed binary values ○
comparison
between
CPU and Set value < count value
Comparison
AD61/ Set value = count value ○
QD62-H01 result
Set value > count value

12/24 V DC 3/6 mA
Preset 5/12/24 V DC 2 to 5 mA
5 V DC 5 mA
On QD62-H01, as the external
External 12/24 V DC 3/6 mA
Count disable - △ input specifications differ, confirm
input 5 V DC 5 mA
the external devices specifications.

Function start - 5/12/24 V DC 2 to 5 mA

Transistor Transistor (shinking type) output


External Coincidence (open collector) output 2 points/channel ○
output output 12/24 V DC 0.5 A 12/24 V DC 0.5 A/1 point 2 A/1 common
Internal current consumption
(5 V DC) 0.3 A 0.3 A ○

Weight 0.5 kg 0.11 kg ○

*1: A program used before replacement can be utilized by setting the start I/O signal numbers of the modules mounted to the right
of the QD62-H01 so that they can be the same as that of the module before replacement.
(Set the start number at "Start XY" of the I/O assignment tab. The number of occupied points of the QD62-H01 cannot be changed.)
*2: The rise/fall time of a pulse affects the counting speed. Countable counting speeds are as follows.
Counting a pulse greater than t = 50 μs may result in a miscount.
• For the AD61 and QD62-H01 (common for 1-phase input and 2-phase input)

t=5μs:50 KPPS
t=50μs:5 KPPS

t t

100
11. Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

E. Comparison of specification between AD61S1 and QD62-H02 ○: Compatible, △: Partial change required
Item AD61S1 QD62-H02 Compatibility Precautions for replacement

32 points 16 points
Occupied I/O points △ *1
(I/O assignment: special 32 points) (I/O assignment: Intelligent 16 points)

Number of channels 2 channel ○

Counting speed Set “2” at the intelligent function


- 10 KPPS ○
switch settings module switch setting.

Phase 1-phase input, 2-phase input ○


Count
input Signal level 5 V DC
signal 12 V DC 2 to 5 mA ○
(φA, φB)
24 V DC
Counting 1-phase input 10 KPPS 1-phase input 10 KPPS
speed ○ *2
(Max.) 2-phase input 7 KPPS 2-phase input 7 KPPS
On QD62-H02, as the value is used
Counting 24-bit unsigned binary 32-bit signed binary values
△ with 32-bit signed binary values,
range (0 to 16, 777, 215) (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
change of sequence program is required.
Perfomance specifications of 1 channels

Counter Type UP/DOWN preset counter + ring counter function ○

Minimum 100 μs 142 μs


count pulse
width
(set input rise ○
time to 5 μs or
less. Duty ratio: 50 μs 50 μs 71 μs 71 μs
50%) (1-phase input) (2-phase input)

Magnitude Comparison
range 24-bit unsigned binary 32-bit signed binary values ○
comparison
between
CPU and Set value < count value
Comparison
AD61S1/ Set value = count value ○
QD62-H02 result
Set value > count value

12/24 V DC 3/6 mA
Preset 5/12/24 V DC 2 to 5 mA
5 V DC 5 mA
On QD62-H02, as the external
External 12/24 V DC 3/6 mA
Count disable - △ input specifications differ, confirm
input 5 V DC 5 mA
the external devices specifications.

Function start - 5/12/24 V DC 2 to 5 mA

Transistor Transistor (shinking type) output


External Coincidence (open collector) output 2 points/channel ○
output output 12/24 V DC 0.5 A 12/24 V DC 0.5 A/1 point 2 A/1 common
Internal current consumption
(5 V DC) 0.3 A 0.3 A ○

Weight 0.5 kg 0.11 kg ○

*1: A program used before replacement can be utilized by setting the start I/O signal numbers of the modules mounted to the right
of the QD62-H02 so that they can be the same with that of the module before replacement.
(Set the start number at "Start XY" of the I/O assignment tab. The number of occupied points of the QD62-H02 cannot be changed.)
*2: The rise/fall time of a pulse affects the counting speed. Countable counting speeds are as follows.
Counting a pulse whose rise/fall time is long may result in a miscount.
• For the AD61S1 and QD62-H02

Rise/fall time 1-phase input 2-phase input


t=5 μs 10 KPPS 7 KPPS
t=500 μs 500 PPS 250 PPS
t t

101
12. Replace DC input modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2, QX81-S2)

12. Replace DC input modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2, QX81-S2)
Solution and Benefit
• When replacing with the existing A Series module, the rated input current of the DC input module
becomes smaller.
In some cases, the previous Q Series DC input modules were not able to detect input signals from
the external devices due to current insufficiency. Such issue can be solved by using DC input
modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2 and QX81-S2).
• The pin arrangement is identical to the existing Q Series DC input module (connector type). The
existing external wiring can be utilized to reduce replacement time.

A. Internal circuits when replacing existing A Series DC input modules


The following figures use AX41 and AX42 as an example of how to replace the existing A Series DC input
modules (AX41, AX42, AX81, AX82, A1SX41 and A1SX81). The internal circuits show the rated input currents
and provide countermeasures for current insufficiency.
* AX41 and AX42 have different common wiring, but the rated input current specifications and the
countermeasure of installing an external resistor are the same.

Rated input current


Rated input current
AX41: 10 mA
QX41: Approx. 4 mA
AX42: 7 mA

Proximity sensors AX41·AX42 Proximity sensors QX41


Main circuit

Main circuit

Replace with
QX41

24 V DC 24 V DC

Measure to correct the rated


Replace with input current insufficiency
QX41-S2

Rated input current


Rated input current adjusted in accordance
QX41-S2: Approx. 6 mA with the connected device

Proximity sensors QX41-S2 Proximity sensors QX41


Main circuit

Main circuit

24 V DC 24 V DC
External resistor not required
外付け抵抗不要 External 外付け抵抗
resistor required (for input current adjustment)
(入力電流調整用)

102
12. Replace DC input modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2, QX81-S2)

B. Specification comparison
(1) Specification comparison of QX41-S2 input module (positive common (sink) type)
Q Series A Series large type A (Small Type) series
Item
QX41-S2 QX41 AX41 AX42 A1SX41
Number of input points 32 32 32 64 32
Rated input voltage 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 10.2 to 26.4 V DC 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Rated input 24 V DC Approx. 6 mA Approx. 4 mA Approx. 10 mA Approx. 7 mA Approx. 7 mA
current 12 V DC (N/A) (N/A) Approx. 4 mA Approx. 3 mA Approx. 3 mA
Input resistance Approx. 3.6 kΩ Approx. 5.6 kΩ Approx. 2.4 kΩ Approx. 3.4 kΩ Approx. 3.3 kΩ
Common terminal
arrangement 32 points / common 8 points / common 32 points / common 32 points / common

40 pin connector 38-point 40 pin connector 40 pin connector


External connection
terminal block connector
method (With solder) (M3 × 6 screws) (With solder) × 2 (With solder)

(2) Specification comparison of QX81-S2 input module (negative common (source) type)
Q Series A Series large type A (Small Type) series
Item
QX81-S2 QX81 AX81 AX82 A1SX81
Number of input points 32 32 32 64 32
Rated input voltage 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 10.2 to 26.4 V DC 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Rated input 24 V DC Approx. 6 mA Approx. 4 mA Approx. 10 mA Approx. 7 mA Approx. 7 mA
current 12 V DC (N/A) (N/A) Approx. 4 mA Approx. 3 mA Approx. 3 mA
Input resistance Approx. 3.6 kΩ Approx. 5.6 kΩ Approx. 2.4 kΩ Approx. 3.4 kΩ Approx. 3.3 kΩ
Common terminal
32 points / common 8 points / common 32 points / common 32 points / common
arrangement
38-point
External connection 37 pin 37 pin 37 pin
terminal block connector
method D-sub connector (M3 × 6 screws) D-sub connector ×2 D-sub connector

Tip
• The pin arrangement of the A Series connector type DC input module is the same as the Q Series.Note that
when using negative common (source) type modules, the A Series DC input module and the connector are
reversed. However, connectors of the existing module can be utilized.
• QX41-S2 and QX81-S2 can also be used when Q large type base unit is used in combination with the
upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co.. Ltd. to connect the existing input module
AX41/AX81's terminal block with the external wiring.

103
13. Use AnS Series modules as spare parts for existing A Series modules

13. Use AnS Series modules as spare parts for existing A Series modules
A-A1S module conversion adapter
This adapter is designed for mounting a small type A Series module on the large type main/extension base unit.
It allows the use of AnS equivalent modules when A Series spare parts are not available.

Large type A Series main/extension


base unit, QA6�B extension base unit

A-A1S module conversion adapter

Small type AnS Series I/O, special function modules, etc.

Model list
Model Outline
A1ADP-XY For mounting I/O modules
A1ADP-SP For mounting special function modules

Notes:
• Up to three adapters per base unit can be used.
• The A-A1S module conversion adapter can also be used with the QA6�B extension base unit, refer to
“Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals) ”
L(NA)08043ENG or “A-A1S Module Conversion Adapter User’s Manual” IB-0800352.
• Specifications differ between the A/QnA and AnS Series modules. For a comparison of the specifications,
refer to “Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA Large Type Series to AnS/Q2AS Small Type Series Handbook”
L(NA)08064ENG.

13.1 Use AnS Series I/O modules as spare parts for large type A Series input/output modules

Solution and Benefit


• If the large type A Series I/O module malfunctions but replacement is not available, the AnS
Series I/O module can be installed on the A1ADP adapter and used as a spare part, allowing the
system to recover quickly.
• If a large type A Series I/O module is not available when the system requires an additional I/O
module, the AnS Series I/O module can be installed on the A1ADP adapter and used as a spare
part.

104
13. Use AnS Series modules as spare parts for existing A Series modules

B. System configuration example

Current configuration Module to be replaced

A3ACPU

Empty
A61P

AX41

AX42

AY41

AY41
A35B

Replace
New configuration
A1ADP-XY
A3ACPU

A1SX42

Empty
A61P

AX41

AY41

AY41
+

A-A1S module
conversion adapter
A35B
A1SX42
Connector connection

C. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 1 Utilize existing module -
CPU module A3ACPU 1 Utilize existing module -
Main base unit A35B 1 Utilize existing module -
AX41 1 Utilize existing module -
Input module
AX42 1 A1SX42 1
A-A1S module conversion adapter (for A1S) N/A - A1ADP-XY 1
Output module AY41 2 Utilize existing module -

Tip
• Replacement is simple because the A1SX42 (AnS Series) has the same connector pin arrangement as the
AX42 (large type A Series). Reconnect the external wire connectors after replacing the modules.
• Some of the specifications (rated input current etc.) differ between the AX42 and the A1SX42. Refer to
“Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA Large Type Series to AnS/Q2AS Small Type Series Handbook”
L(NA)08064ENG for details.

105
13. Use AnS Series modules as spare parts for existing A Series modules

13.2 Use AnS Series module as spare parts for large type A Series computer link module
Solution and Benefit
• If the computer link module malfunctions but large type A Series spare parts are not available, the
AnS Series computer link module can be installed on the A1ADP adapter and used as a
replacement, allowing the system to recover quickly.
• If a large type A Series computer link module is not available when the system requires an
additional module, the AnS Series computer link module can be installed on the A1ADP adapter
and used as a spare part.

The following is an example of replacing an A Series computer link module (AJ71UC24) with AnS Series
computer link modules (A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4) using the A1ADP adapters.

A. Instructions
(1) Remove the AJ71UC24 from the base unit, and mount the A1SJ71UC24-R2 and A1SJ71UC24-R4 on the
base unit using the A1ADP adapters.
Note: The large type A Series computer link modules have two channels (RS232C and RS422), whereas
the AnS Series computer link modules only have one. Therefore, if two channels are used, two
modules are needed.
(2) A program modification is not required if:
• The AnS module set to the No-protocol mode is mounted on the same slot as the existing module.
• The AnS module set to the Dedicated protocol mode is mounted on the empty slot.
(This is because the No-protocol mode requires a transmission program but the Dedicated protocol
mode does not.)

B. System configuration example


• Computer link module options
Model Outline
Current configuration Module to be replaced
A1SJ71UC24-R2 RS232C: 1 channel
A1SJ71UC24-R4 RS422/485: 1 channel
2-channel
AJ71UC24
A3ACPU

module
Empty
A61P

AX41

AX41

AY41

A35B

Replace A1ADP-SP A1ADP-SP

New configuration
A-A1S A-A1S
conversion conversion
adapter adapter
A1SJ71UC24-R4

A1SJ71UC24-R4
A1ADP-SP

A1ADP-SP
A3ACPU
A61P

AX41

AX41

AY41
+

A35B 1-channel 1-channel


module module
Channel set to Channel set to
No-protocol Dedicated protocol
mode mode

A1SJ71UC24-R2 or A1SJ71UC24-R2 or
A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71UC24-R4
set to No-protocol mode set to Dedicated protocol mode
(Mount this module on the same (Mount this module on the empty slot)
slot as the existing module)

106
13. Use AnS Series modules as spare parts for existing A Series modules

C. Module selection example (when two channels are used)


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 1 Utilize existing module -
CPU module A3ACPU 1 Utilize existing module -
Main base unit A35B 1 Utilize existing module -
Input module AX41 2 Utilize existing module -
A-A1S module conversion adapter (for A1S) N/A - A1ADP-SP 2
A1SJ71UC24-R2 1
Computer link module AJ71UC24 1
A1SJ71UC24-R4 1
Output module AY41 1 Utilize existing module -

Tip
• The AJ71UC24 and A1SJ71UC24-R2/A1SJ71UC24-R4 have the same buffer memory address and
transmission X/Y address assignment for the No-protocol mode. Therefore, it is not required to modify the
program if the module set to the No-protocol mode is mounted on the same slot as the existing module.
• The module set to the Dedicated protocol mode does not require a programmable controller program. Also,
the external device connected to this module can communicate regardless of its slot address-changing the
address does not affect communication.
However, when the “On-demand function” is used, it is required to modify the program due to changes in the
designated address for the “TO instruction” and handshake X/Y address.

107
MEMO

108
Part Ⅱ: Programming

109
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU


The following are precautions when converting ACPU programs to QCPU using "Change PLC type":
• The instruction format may change after executing “Change PLC type”.
Also, while ACPU instructions that use accumulators (A0 and A1) do not specify device name and device
number, QCPU instructions do.
• Modification of the program is needed when instruction specifications are different.
• Instructions are replaced with SM1255 when an eligible instruction is available upon execution of "Change
PLC type", but is unusable due to specification differences.
There are several inquiries regarding conversion of instructions, their specifications, and corrective actions after
conversion. This chapter explains the most frequently asked questions when converting ACPU programs to
QCPU programs.

A. Peripheral devices using existing A (Large Type) and A0J2 Series CPU program
The following CPU types are not compatible with GX Developer, so the PC type must be changed to GX
Developer compatible CPU types with the following instructions before the programs can be used.
• GX Developer incompatible CPU
AnCPU (including CPU with link function)
A3HCPU (including CPU with link function)
A3MCPU (including CPU with link function)
A0J2CPU (including CPU with link function)

• Instructions
1) For A6GPP(SW�GP-GPPA)
1. Using A6GPP(SW�GP-GPPA), read the program from the existing CPU with “Read from PC”.
m
2. Change PC type to the GX Developer compatible A Series CPU on hand.
m
3. Write the program with revised PC type into the GX Developer compatible A Series CPU on hand.
m
4. Using “Read from PC”, read the program from ACPU that was written with GX Developer.
m
5. After replacing with GX Developer, change the PC type to QCPU type.

2) For MS-DOS compatible GPPA software (SW�IVD/NX-GPPA)


1. Using the MS-DOS compatible GPPA software, read the program from the existing CPU with “Read from PC”.
m
2. Change PC type to the GX Developer compatible A Series CPU.
m
3. Using the GX Developer’s other format read function, use the program for which the PC type was changed.
m
4. After replacing with GX Developer, change PC type to QCPU type.

3) For Windows XP compatible ladder editing tool (LADDER HELPER 3)


1. Using the ladder editing tool (LADDER HELPER 3), read the program from the existing CPU with “Read from PC”.
m
2. Change PC type to the GX Developer compatible A Series CPU.
m
3. Using the GX Developer’s other format read function, use the program for which the PC type was changed.
m
4. After replacing with GX Developer, change PC type to QCPU type.

* The ladder editing tool (LADDER HELPER 3) is a product of “ILC Co., Ltd.”

110
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

14.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format


(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)
14.1.1 Instructions that use accumulators (A0, A1)
Some QCPU operation processing instructions are different from their corresponding ACPU instructions in
format.
This section explains the instructions that have different specified formats.

Frequently asked questions regarding the conversion of ACPU to QCPU program

(Inquiry example)
1. Instructions with different format from that of ACPU instructions are used when
upgrading to QCPU. Is further program modification necessary?

2. The devices "SD718 and SD719", which were not used in ACPU, are automatically part
of the QCPU instructions after replacement. What are these devices for? Is operation
affected by these devices?

3. "Change PLC type" executes a direct conversion of several ACPU instructions, such as
assignment and saving of operation data, but the instruction format remains similar to
that of ACPU instructions. Is it possible to further simplify the QCPU instructions using a
similar method?

(Answer)
ACPU instructions that use accumulators (A0 and A1) have different formats when
converted to QCPU instructions. These accumulators are replaced by devices SD718 and
SD719.
Therefore, the same operation as in ACPU is executed even if the instruction format is
different and SD718 and SD719 are used.
In addition, a group of multiple instructions, such as instructions to transfer data to the
ACPU accumulators (A0 and A1), can be converted to QCPU instructions and further
modified to simplify the program and reduce the number of steps.

A. Instructions that use accumulators (A0 and A1)


(1) ACPU
Instructions that use accumulators (A0 and A1) can execute operations without explicitly specifying A0 and
A1 as the source and destination device. Also, the operation result is stored in the accumulators A0 and
A1 without specifying the device in which it is stored in.
(2) QCPU
QCPU instructions need to specify a source and destination device.

111
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

B. ACPU to QCPU instruction replacement


Replacing ACPU program with QCPU program using “Change PLC type” converts ACPU instructions into
QCPU instructions. Therefore, even if the accumulators A0 and A1 are not explicitly specified in the ACPU
program, the devices SD718 and SD719 will automatically take over the accumulators’ functionalities in the
QCPU program.
However, if A0 and A1 are explicitly described in the ACPU program, the devices SD718 and SD719 will
directly replace the accumulators.
The program converted through “Change PLC type” will execute normally and modifications are not necessary.

C. Changing to QCPU instruction format


The automatically converted programs will execute without problems. However, modifying the instructions into
QCPU format will significantly simplify the program and reduce the number of steps.

D. List of instructions that use accumulators (A0 and A1)

QCPU/QnACPU AnUCPU/AnACPU/AnNCPU
Function
Format of instructions Remarks Format of instructions Remarks
• Rotation data is set
ROR D n • D: Rotation data ROR n
in A0.*1
Right rotation of
• Rotation data is set
16-bit data • D: Rotation data
RCR D n RCR n in A0.*1
• Use SM700 for carry flag • Use M9012 for carry flag.

• Rotation data is set


ROL D n • D: Rotation data ROL n
in A0.*1
Left rotation of
• Rotation data is set
16-bit data • D: Rotation data
RCL D n RCL n in A0.*1
• Use SM700 for carry flag • Use M9012 for carry flag.

• Rotation data is set


DROR D n • D: Rotation data DROR n
in A0, A1.*2
Right rotation of
• Rotation data is set
32-bit data • D: Rotation data
DRCR D n DRCR n in A0, A1.*2
• Use SM700 for carry flag • Use M9012 for carry flag.

• Rotation data is set


DROL D n • D: Rotation data DROL n
in A0, A1.*2
Left rotation of
• D: Rotation data • Rotation data is set
32-bit data
DRCL D n • Use SM700 for carry flag DRCL n in A0, A1.*2
• Use M9012 for carry flag.

16-bit data • Search result is stored • Search result is stored


SER S1 S2 D n SER S1 S2 n
search in D, D +1 device in A0, A1.
32-bit data • Search result is stored • Search result is stored
DSER S1 S2 D n DSER S1 S2 n
search in D, D +1device in A0, A1.
16-bit data • Check result is stored • Check result is stored
SUM S D SUM S
checks in D device in A0.
32-bit data • Check result is stored • Check result is stored
DSUM S D DSUM S
checks in D device in A0.

*1 Rotation result is stored in A0.


*2 Rotation result is stored in A0 and A1.

112
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

E. Program replacement example


(1) Right rotation of 16-bit data instruction(ROR)

ACPU program
X0 * (Transfer the rotation data to A0)
0 MOVP D0 A0
Instruction Rotation
execution execution
condition device
* (Execute the rotation)
RORP K3

* (Transfer the rotation result)


MOVP A0 D0
Rotation
execution
device
M9012
M0
Carry flag Check Carry
ON/OFF

16 END

Replacement QCPU program


X0 (Transfer the rotation data)
0 MOVP D0 SD718
Instruction Rotation ACPU [A0]
execution execution converted
condition device to special D
(Execute the rotation)
RORP SD718 K3
ACPU [A0]
converted
to special D
(Transfer the rotation result)
MOVP SD718 D0
ACPU [A0] Rotation
converted execution
to special D device
SM700
M0
Carry flag Check Carry
(ACPU M9012) ON/OFF

51 END

Equivalent QCPU program in instruction format


Execute rotation of and store the result in the specified device.

X0
0 RORP D0 K3
Instruction Rotation
execution execution
condition SM700 device
M0
Carry flag Check Carry
(ACPU M9012) ON/OFF

39 END

113
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

(2) Search instruction(SER)

ACPU program
* Execute the search instruction: store the result in the accumulators (A0, A1).

X1
0 SERP D10 D100 K10
Instruction Search data Head device of
execution storage device searched data
condition
* (Search result: transfer location first matched location)
MOVP A0 D0
First matched
location

* (Search result: transfer the number of matched data)


MOVP A1 D1
Number of
matches

20 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Execute the search instruction: store the result in SD718 and SD719, which are replacement for A0 and A1.

X1
0 SERP D10 D100 SD718 K10
Instruction Search data Head device of First matched
execution storage device searched data location found
condition
(Transfer the first matched location found)
MOVP SD718 D0
First matched First matched
location found location

(Transfer the number of matched data)


MOVP SD719 D1
Number of Number of
matched data matches

77 END

Equivalent QCPU program in instruction format


* Execute the search instruction: store the result in the specified devices (D0, D1).

X1
0 SERP D10 D100 D0 K10
Instruction Search data Head device of First matched
execution storage device searched data location
condition
34 END

114
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

14.1.2 ASCII code conversion instruction "ASC"


ASCII code conversion instruction is replaced with SM1255 because it is an unconvertible instruction and its
specification is incompatible with QCPU. Modification in accordance with the specifications is needed. (For Basic
model QCPUs, it is replaced with SM999.)
This section explains replacement of the ASCII code conversion instruction "ASC".

Frequently asked questions regarding the conversion of ACPU to QCPU program

(Inquiry example)
1. Instead of the $MOV instruction, which has similar functionality, the ASCII code
conversion instruction "ASC" is replaced with SM1255 as an unconvertible instruction.
Are the $MOV and ASC instructions the same?

2. The Transition Handbook (Fundamentals) lists $MOV as a conversion candidate for the
ASC instruction. Are there any precautions in this modification?

(Answer)
The ACPU instruction, ASC, and the $MOV instruction in QCPU are slightly different. For
this reason, ASC is replaced with SM1255 as an unconvertible instruction. Check the
specifications and functions before changing to the $MOV instruction.

A. Specifications of ASCII codes conversion instruction


The following are the ASCII code conversion instruction specifications for ACPU and QCPU
(1) ACPU (Instruction: ASC)
• Converts up to 8 characters.
• When there are 7 characters or less, it is converted and stored as 8 characters (4 words).
(space (20H) is stored until reaching 8 characters.)
• “P” is not appended to the instruction, however, the operation is only executed when the execution
condition pulses ON.
(2) QCPU (Instruction: $MOV)
• Converts up to 32 characters.
• Device points of storage destination may change (number of characters + 1 byte (rounded up in units of
word)).
• Execute the operation as long as the execution condition is ON.
(To execute the operation only when the condition for instruction execution pulses ON, change the
instruction to “$MOVP”.)

115
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

B. Occupied device points


The ACPU instruction, ASC, occupies 4 words. The number of device points occupied by the QCPU
instruction, $MOV, may change according to the number of characters+1 byte.
When replacing an ASC instruction that specifies 8 characters with the QCPU $MOV instruction, the number of
occupied points increases because the stored ASCII code occupies 4 devices + 1 word (delimiter "00H"). If the
additional device was being used for other purposes, its content will clear to "0000H".
Modification is necessary when the devices used by the ASC instruction +1 are used for other operations.

(Example of stored data)


(1) 5 characters
ACPU: (ASC 1234A D0)
QCPU: ($MOV “1234A” D0)
Device ACPU QCPU
D0 3231 (H) 3231 (H)
D1 3433 (H) 3433 (H)
D2 2041 (H) 0041 (H)
D3 2020 (H) No change
D4 No change No change

(2) 8 characters
ACPU: (ASC 1234ABCD D0)
QCPU: ($MOV “1234ABCD” D0)
Device ACPU QCPU
D0 3231 (H) 3231 (H)
D1 3433 (H) 3433 (H)
D2 4241 (H) 4241 (H)
D3 4443 (H) 4443 (H)
D4 No change 0000 (H)

116
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

C. Program replacement example


ACPU "ASC" instruction program
* Up to 8 characters of ASCII codes are stored in D0 to D3.

M0
0 ASC ABCD1234 D0

* Up to 8 characters of ASCII codes are stored in D10 to D13.


* 5 characters are specified. Higher byte of D12: 20H, D13: 2020H.
M1
14 ASC XYZ78 D10

28 END

Replacement QCPU program


(Unconvertible instructions are replaced with SM1255)
* Conversion to character string instruction, ASC, is unconvertible and replaced with "SM1255".

M0
0 SM1255

* Conversion to character string instruction, ASC, is unconvertible and replaced with "SM1255".
M1
3 SM1255

6 END

Modified QCPU program using "$MOV" instruction


8 characters are specified, and ASCII codes are stored in D0 to D3.
Since “00H” is added after the last character, “0000H” is stored in D4.
When the program is replaced, make sure that D4 is not used elsewhere for other purposes.

M0
0 $MOVP “ABCD1234” D0

Stores ASCII code of up to 32 characters in D10.


The last occupied device is D25 when 32 characters are specified.
However, “0000H” is stored in D26 because “00H” is added after the last character.
M1
103 $MOVP “1234567890123456” D10

203 END

117
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

14.2 Replace AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions


AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions can be converted into QCPU instruction format. This section explains
the replacement of AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions.

Frequently asked questions regarding the conversion of ACPU to QCPU program

(Inquiry example)
Several AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions were used in the program. However,
converting the program to QCPU format reduced them to just one instruction. Can this
program be executed as it is?

(Answer)
Replacing AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions with QCPU instructions changes and
simplifies the instruction format. Further modification of the program is not necessary.

(Inquiry example)
Can the AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions for special function modules also be
replaced?
(Answer)
AnACPU/AnUCPU special function modules and QCPU intelligent function modules have
different functions, specifications, number of occupied points, etc. The AnACPU/AnUCPU
special function module instructions cannot access the QCPU, therefore, they are replaced
with SM1255 as unconvertible instructions.
Modify the program according to the functions and specifications of QCPU intelligent
function modules. Instructions for extended file registers and data link are also replaced
with SM1255. Please modify the instructions in accordance with QCPU functions and
specifications.

118
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

A. Representations of dedicated instruction


The QCPU unifies AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions- LEDA, LEDB, LEDC, SUB, and LEDR- into one
single instruction, which has the same format as the basic and application instructions. Instructions that do
not have a corresponding QCPU instruction are replaced with "OUT SM1255". Replace or delete the
instructions that have been converted to "OUT SM1255".

QCPU AnACPU/AnUCPU

Command
LEDA(B) Instruction name
LEDC/SUB S
Command
Instruction name S D n LEDC/SUB D
LEDC/SUB n
LEDR

S, D, n indicate the data used in the instructions.

B. Dedicated instructions with changed instruction names


In AnACPU/AnUCPU, dedicated instructions share the same name as basic and application instructions.
In QCPU, instruction names have been changed.

Function QCPU AnACPU/AnUCPU


Floating decimal point addition E+ ADD
Floating decimal point subtraction E- SUB
Floating decimal point multiplication E* MUL
Floating decimal point division E/ DIV
Data dissociation NDIS DIS
Data linking NUNI UNI
Changing check pattern CHKCIR, CHKEND CHK, CHKEND

119
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

C. Program replacement example


(1) Direct output instructions

AnACPU/AnUCPU program
* Direct output.

M0 * (DOUT: Direct output instructions)


0 LEDA DOUT

LEDC Y10
Direct output
device

LEDR

18 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Direct output.

M0
0 DY10
Direct output
device

4 END

(2) Conversion instruction from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data


AnACPU/AnUCPU program
* Conversion from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data.

M0 * (Conversion instruction from ASCII to BIN)


0 LEDB DHABIN

LEDC D0
Head device of
ASCII data

LEDC D10
Conversion
result

LEDR

21 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Conversion from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data.

M0 * (Conversion instruction from ASCII to BIN)


0 DHABINP D0 D10
Head device of Conversion
ASCII data result

6 END

120
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

(3) Addition instruction of floating decimal point type real number

AnACPU/AnUCPU program
* Real number addition instruction.
* (E+: Replacement for ADD, real number
M2 addition instruction )
0 LEDB ADD

LEDC D10
Head device of data
to be added

LEDC D20
Head device
of first addend

LEDC D30
Head device
of addition result

LEDR

24 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Real number addition instruction.

M2 * (E+: Replacement for ADD, real number addition instruction )


0 E+P D10 D20 D30
Head device of data Head device Head device
to be added of first addend of addition result

7 END

121
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

14.3 Use index register as a 32-bit (2-word) device


After replacing ACPU instructions that use index registers, review and modify the programs because the A
Series and Q Series index registers differ in specifications (Z and V are for ACPU, and Z0 to Z15 are for QCPU).
The following are precautions for converting ACPU instructions that use index registers.

Frequently asked questions regarding the conversion of ACPU to QCPU program

(Inquiry example)
1. Device modification using index registers resulted in different Z and V device numbers.
Which QCPU devices are the Z and V devices in ACPU replaced with?

2. Index registers were used as 32-bit devices (2 words) in ACPU. However, when
upgrading to QCPU, the values of the index registers used for other purposes were
overwritten.
Can index registers be used as 32-bit devices (2 words) in QCPU?

(Answer)
The ACPU index registers, Z, Z1 to Z6, V, and V1 to V6, are replaced with Z0 to Z15. If the
index registers were used as 16-bit devices (1 word) in ACPU, the device numbers will
change once upgraded to QCPU. However, modification of the program is unnecessary.
If the index registers were used as 32-bit devices (2 words) in ACPU, the combination of Z
and V converts to Zn and Zn+1 in QCPU. The index register numbers are different after
replacement and modification of the program is necessary.

122
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

A. Replacing index register


"Z, Z1 to Z6, V, V1 to V6" and "Z0 to Z15" are used as index register for the ACPU and QCPU,
respectively. Therefore, their specifications differ.
"V" is used as edge relay for the QCPU. This device is used to store the PLS/PLF information of the contacts
found at the start of the ladder block.
The following table shows how the index registers should be replaced when changing ACPU programs to
QCPU programs using "Change PLC type".

ACPU QCPU
Z Z0
Z1 to Z6 Z1 to Z6
V Z7
V1 to V6 Z8 to Z13

Tip
When indexing timer/counter contact instructions, such as “LD T0”, the index register limitations do not apply to
AnA/AnUCPU.
Due to the specifications, only index registers Z0 and Z1 can be used to index timer/counter contact
instructions in QCPU.
If the existing AnA/AnUCPU program uses index registers other than Z and Z1, the instructions are
unconvertible and are replaced with SM1255. In this case, it is necessary to modify the program.

B. Index register 32-bit specification


When using index registers in 32-bit instructions in ACPU, Z register is the low- order 16 bits and the V
register, with the same number as Z, is the high-order 16 bits.
Alternatively, the QCPU treats Zn and Zn + 1 as the low-order and high-order 16 bits respectively.
The index registers should be corrected if "Change PLC type" is performed on a program that includes 32-bit
index registers.
The following is an example of instructions that have 32-bit operation results.

Instruction ACPU QCPU


V1, Z1 Z2, Z1
DMOV D0 Z1
(High order) (Low order) (High order) (Low order)
Z1(Quotient) Z1(Quotient)
/ D0 D1 Z1
V1(Remainder) Z2(Remainder

When converting an ACPU program to QCPU using "Change PLC type", the operation result may be stored
to an unintended index register number.

123
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

C. Program replacement example


(1) When using index register as 16-bit (1-word) data
The index register numbers will change after converting the ACPU program to QCPU, but it is not necessary
to modify the program.

ACPU program
* Indexing devices with index register Z.

M0
0 MOVP D0 R0Z
Logging data Data logging
Data logging save destination
command

INCP Z

* Indexing devices with index register V.


M1
9 MOVP W0 R1000V
Logging data Data logging
Data logging save destination
command

INCP V

18 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Indexing devices with index register Z.

M0
0 MOVP D0 R0Z0
Logging data Data logging
Data logging save destination
command Z0 <- replaced ACPU device “Z”

INCP Z0

* Indexing devices with index register V.


M1
6 MOVP W0 R1000Z7
Logging data Data logging
Data logging save destination
command Z7 <- replaced ACPU device “V”

INCP Z7

12 END

124
14. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU

(2) When using index register as 32-bit (2-word) data


The index register numbers and their combination will change after converting the ACPU program to QCPU.
It is necessary to modify the program.

ACPU program
X0
0 /P D0 K10 Z
Data to be
divided
Quotient is stored in Z and remainder
is stored in V.
MOVP V R0Z1
Remainder data
save destination
Z1 does not interfere with the division instruction.

INCP Z1

18 END

Replacement QCPU program


X0
0 /P D0 K10 Z0
Data to be
divided
Quotient is stored in Z0 and remainder
is stored in Z1.
MOVP Z1 R0Z1
Remainder data
Z1 is not stored in the proper location because Z1 is overwritten save destination
by the remainder of the division instruction.

INCP Z1

12 END

Modified/corrected QCPU program


X0
0 /P D0 K10 Z0
Data to be
divided Quotient is stored in Z0 and remainder
is stored in Z1.
MOVP Z1 R0Z2
Remainder data
Since Z1 is overwritten by the remainder of the division save destination
instruction, change it to an unused index register.

INCP Z2

12 END

125
15. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

15. Utilize SFC programs (replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)


Solution and Benefit
• The SFC program (MELSAP-ΙΙ) created in ACPU can be converted to QCPU SFC program
(MELSAP3) through "Change PLC type" in GX Developer. This program can be used without
further modifications.
• SFC program (MELSAP3) has the same specifications in QnACPU as in QCPU. Therefore, it is not
necessary to modify the program after executing "Change PLC type" in GX Developer.
• SFC programs (MELSAP-ΙΙ and MELSAP3) created with MS-DOS-compatible programming
software ((SW�IVD-GPPA and SW�IVD-GPPQ) can be converted and utilized after being imported
to GX Developer.

This chapter explains how to replace SFC programs (MELSAP-ΙΙ) created in ACPU with SFC programs
(MELSAP3) for QCPU and the necessary modifications after the replacement.

126
15. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

A. Operation for utilizing SFC program

Procedure 1: Changing programmable controller type in GX Developer

"Change PLC type" is a function that changes the target programmable controller type of the data being read
through GX Developer. The sequence programs are also automatically converted to comply with the target
programmable controller. However, instructions that cannot convert automatically are replaced with the
instructions shown below.
• High Performance Model QCPU: OUT SM1255
• Basic Model QCPU: OUT SM999

Search for these "OUT" instructions or SM1255/SM999 devices and manually modify the converted programs.
Additionally, intelligent function modules and network modules may require program and parameter
modifications.

(Project menu)

([Change PLC type] window)

* For detail operation instructions, refer to the following manual.


Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA(Large Type)Series to Q Series Handbook(Fundamentals)(L-08043ENG)
[7.1.2 Changing programmable controller type]

Tip
Files in GPPQ/GPPA format, which were created/saved using SW�IVD-GPPA, SW�IVD-GPPQ, should be
converted into GX Developer format using "Import file".
Execute "Change PLC type" after the file is imported to GX Developer.
* For detail operation instructions, refer to the following manual.
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA(Large Type)Series to Q Series Handbook(Fundamentals)(L-08043ENG)
[7.1.4 Reading (Reusing) other format files]

127
15. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

Procedure 2: Program settings in GX Developer

When SFC programs have been created as ACPU program file, they are replaced with the following 2
programs.
• Ladder instructions: MAIN
• SFC programs: MAIN-SFC

To execute multiple programs, such as "MAIN" and "MAIN-SFC", go to "Program" found in "PLC parameter" to
set the program name, execution type, and the order of execution during each scan.

(Program file name after changing programmable controller type)

(Program settings window)

* For detail operation instructions, refer to the following manual.


Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA(Large Type)Series to Q Series Handbook(Fundamentals)(L-08043ENG)
[7.7.10 Setting method when multiple sequence programs are created]

128
15. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

B. Precautions for replacing MELSAP-II with MELSAP3


The basic operation of the MELSAP3 is the same as the MELSAP-ΙΙ, but the specifications are partially
different.
This section provides the precautions for the replacement.
(1) Starting SFC program
The SFC program can be started by using the special relay for starting/stopping the SFC program.
The special relay used for starting/stopping SFC programs changes according to the programmable
controller type.
ACPU: M9101 -> QCPU: SM321
Please take the precaution listed below because the specifications of the special relays are different for
each CPU.

Specifications
Precautions for replacement
MELSAP-ΙΙ (M9101) MELSAP3 (M321)
When starting/stopping the SFC program
SFC program starts up at default,
Switches on and off with user according to user conditions, operations
since system is automatically turned
operation. such as turning SM321 on/off must be
on.
handled in the program.

(2) Block information (SFC information device)


The MELSAP-ΙΙ and MELSAP3 have different method of executing the "Block START/STOP" and
"Reading of the number of active steps and active step numbers" with block information (SFC
information device).

Specifications
Item Precautions for replacement
MELSAP-ΙΙ MELSAP3
[START] [START] [START]
Switching the block active bit Switching on the block The program does not need adjustments
on executes forced start. START/STOP bit forcibly when a SFC program for ACPU is
[STOP] starts the corresponding converted to QCPU because
Switching on the block clear block. the "Block active bit" is replaced with
Block START/ bit stops the block and [STOP] "Block START/STOP" bit.
STOP methods switching it off executes Switching off the block [STOP]
forced stop. START/STOP forcibly stops The "Block clear bit" resets the "Block
the corresponding block. START/STOP bit".
Add the SFC control instruction
"RST BLm" to the program.
Delete the program that switches
the "Block clear bit" on/off.

The number of Reads the number of active Reads only the number of active To read the active step numbers,
active steps steps in the corresponding steps in the corresponding block. use the "Active step batch readout
and active step block and active step numbers. instructions (MOV, DMOV, BMOV)".
numbers reading

129
15. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

重 要
IMPORTANT
Performing the following operations on SFC programs created with SW�IVD-GPPA may result in abnormal
SFC chart display and cause creation fault in GX Developer.
• Executing "Import file" in GX Developer to import an SFC program saved in a personal computer.
• Executing "Read from PLC" in GX Developer to read an SFC program from an ACPU.
If a creation fault occurs in the SFC chart, add a dummy step with SW�IVD-GPPA and import the file to GX
Developer.

1. Creation fault examples

No step

No step
No step

2. SFC chart modification


examples
(When adding a dummy step) (When changing to jump transition)

Jump
destination
step

Selective coupling
Addition of
changes to jump transition.
dummy step
The jump destination step
is the one immediately
following the coupling
before modification.

130
15. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

C. Precautions for modifying SFC chart


(1) Add “X (dummy step)” as an additional step
If “�(step)” is added, the step number + “?” is displayed/printed due to un-programmed operation output.
(2) As shown below, create a transition condition program in the additional step using a series transition (+).

Tran

If the transition condition program is not created, the transition condition number + “?” is displayed/printed
due to un-programmed transition condition.

131
MEMO

132
Part Ⅲ: Application

133
16. Replace AD75P/M with QD75P/D/M/MH while utilizing existing positioning parameters and data

16. Replace AD75P/M with QD75P/D/M/MH while utilizing existing positioning


parameters and data

Solution and Benefit


• Existing positioning parameters and data of the AD75P�(-S3)/M� can be used for the QD75P�/
D�/M�/MH� with minimal modifications, reducing upgrade time.
• Although the AD75P�(-S3)/M� and QD75P�/D�/M�/MH� may have different addresses even in
the same setting item, mistakes can be prevented because parameters and data can be used
without having to worry about buffer memory address.

The following is an example of replacing an existing A Series positioning module with the Q Series while utilizing
existing parameters and data.
A. Instructions
After replacing the A Series modules with the Q Series, reuse/convert positioning parameters and data of the
AD75 using GX Configurator software package for positioning modules.

Software packages to be used are as follows:


• For AD75 models: GX Configurator-AP Version 1 (SW�D5C-AD75P-E)
• For QD75 models: GX Configurator-QP Version 2 (SW�D5C-QD75P-E)

B. System configuration example

Current configuration New configuration


Power supply

QCPU
Power supply
AD75P/M

D/M/MH
QD75P/
ACPU

Replace
module

module

Utilize existing positioning parameters and data when replacing.

134
16. Replace AD75P/M with QD75P/D/M/MH while utilizing existing positioning parameters and data

C. How to use existing positioning parameters and data


Step 1
Read positioning parameters and data from the AD75 using GX Configurator-AP.

OS memory Flash ROM

Parameters OS memory
GX Configurator-AP
(SW�D5C-AD75P-E) Positioning data Positioning data
No. 1 to 100 No. 1 to 100

Start block data Start block data

Positioning data Positioning data


No. 101 to 600 No. 101 to 600

Buffer memory
Write to AD75/read from AD75/verify
AD75 data Parameters

Positioning data
No. 1 to 100
Write to/read from Flash ROM
Start block data

Monitor data,
control data area, etc.
AD75� poisoning module

Step 2
Save positioning parameters and data using GX Configurator-AP.* (Creating a AD75 file)
* Save in the file format to be read by GX Configurator-QP.

135
16. Replace AD75P/M with QD75P/D/M/MH while utilizing existing positioning parameters and data

Step 3
Read the AD75 file using GX Configurator-QP.

GX Configurator-QP
(SW�D5C-QD75P-E)

Example of reading a file created with GX-Configurator-AP.

Step 4
Specify item(s) that need to be changed in GX Configurator-QP.

136
16. Replace AD75P/M with QD75P/D/M/MH while utilizing existing positioning parameters and data

Step 5
Write all positioning parameters and data, including modified data, to the QD75 using GX Configurator-QP.

Buffer memory

Parameters
Via QCPU, Q Series compatible serial
communication module, or Servo parameters
MELSECNET/H network remote I/O
module* Positioning data

*Only when directly connected to the Block start data


remote I/O module.

Flash ROM

Parameters
Write to module/read from module/verify module data
Servo parameters

Positioning data

Block start data


Write to Flash ROM

Tip
• To use GX Configurator-AP data in GX Configurator-QP, it is necessary to save the file in a format that can
be read by GX Configurator-QP. Files saved in GX Configurator-AP format cannot be read by GX
Configurator-QP.
• Due to specification differences between the AD75 and QD75, some positioning parameters may require
setting changes. Refer to the related manuals for details on the modifications. Note that positioning data
does not require any modifications.
• Related manuals
(a) AD75

Title Manual No.


A1SD75P1-S3/P2-S3/P3-S3, AD75P1-S3/P2-S3/P3-S3 Positioning Module IB-66716
User's Manual
A1SD75M1/M2/M3, AD75M1/M2/M3 Positioning Module User's Manual IB-66715
GX Configurator-AP Version 1 Operating Manual IB-66900
(b) QD75

Title Manual No.


Type QD75P/QD75D Positioning Module User's Manual SH-080058
QD75M1/QD75M2/QD75M4 User's Manual (Details) IB-0300062
QD75MH1/QD75MH2/QD75MH4 User's Manual (Details) IB-0300117
GX Configurator-QP Version 2 Operating Manual SH-080172

137
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link


refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool
Solution and Benefit
A sequence program (sample program) can be created to automatically perform link refresh by
entering the existing network conditions in the A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool.

A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool


This tool is designed to reduce the work load when replacing A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules.
The tool contains the following functions.
• Extracts parts of the program that were not automatically converted and displays the appropriate modification
procedures. (Reduces program modification time.)
• Automatically creates link refresh sample program when using MELSECNET(ΙΙ)/B local station data link
module, A1SJ71A�23(B)Q. (Program creation is unnecessary as it is automatically generated)
For details on A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool, please contact your local Mitsubishi sales office or
representative.

138
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

A. Conditions for program creation


(1) System configuration example

Master station(M)
Power supply

A3ACPUP21

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
module

MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

Local station 1
Q02H
CPU

module

module

module
Q61P

I/O

I/O

I/O

Q38B
QC�B
The A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool creates
a link refresh sequence program for this module.
Empty

Empty

Empty
A1SJ71
AP23Q
61PN
A1S

QA1S65B

Second tier
Local station 2 Local station 1
A2ACPUP21
Power supply

Power supply
A2ACPUP21

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
module

module

Third tier's
Local station 3 master station(m) Local station 2
Power supply

Power supply
A2NCPUP21

A2NCPUP21
I/O module

I/O module

Third tier
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
AJ71AP21
module

module

139
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

(2) Master station network parameter (Master station for the second tier)
The following are examples of the master station's network parameters and transient communication
program.
The parameter settings for the master station are the conditions used to create a link refresh sequence
program for the local station data link module.
(a) Network type selection

(b) Setting examples for each network type


1) MELSECNET mode (Network range assignment: set for the first half only)

140
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

2) MELSECNET(ΙΙ) composite mode (Network range assignment: set for the first half and second half)

(c) Program example of transient instruction


Transient communication is being performed if the following instructions are in the master station's
sequence program.
The use of transient communication is one of the conditions that should be taken into account when
creating a link refresh sequence program.

X0 M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203


LRDP K1 D0 D100 K10
Read from LRDP LRDP LWTP LWTP Other station Read data
other station instruction instruction instruction instruction read device storage
received completed received completed
X1 M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203
LWTP K1 D20 D300 K10
Write to LRDP LRDP LWTP LWTP Other station
other station instruction instruction instruction instruction write destination
received completed received completed device

141
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

B. Procedure for creating link refresh sequence program


The following are the procedures for creating a link refresh sequence program using the A/QnA -> Q
conversion support tool.
Step 1: Start up
Start the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".
Click the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool" icon.

Step 2: Menu selection


Display the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool" menu.

(1) Click "Refresh program generation tool for MELSECNET (ΙΙ) local station execute" on the menu screen.

142
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 3: Enter conditions for program creation


Enter conditions for program creation in the "Refresh program generation tool for MELSECNET (ΙΙ) local
station" screen.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e) (f)

(a) Select a Q Series CPU type to which MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station module is mounted.
For the case shown in "(1) System configuration example", found under "A. Conditions for program
creation", select "Q02H".
(b) Enter the I/O number of the slot on which MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station module is mounted.
This setting determines the start number of the FROM/TO instruction's access target.
Enter the I/O number after checking the actual system.
The CPU may stop if the I/O number differs from the one that is actually mounted.
(c) Set the network type (mode) to match the one set in the master station (M) network parameters.
Refer to "(2) Master station network parameter (Master station (M) for the second tier)" under "A.
Conditions for program creation" for an example.
(d) Check this box if the station which contains the refresh program is a local station in the third tier.
(e) Refer to "(c) Program example of transient instruction" found in section (2) of "A. Conditions for program
creation", and select the check boxes if the transient instructions corresponding to "local station data link
module mounted station" exist in the master station program.
(f) Select this button to move on to step 4, link refresh device setting.
Make sure the settings are correct.

143
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 4: Link refresh device setting


Set link refresh devices for the CPU module side.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(a) Set MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station's special link relay and link special registers as the link refresh devices
on the CPU module side.
Device numbers are fixed when the device name is SM or SD.
For other device names, device numbers can be specified.
Link refresh is not performed if the "Device name" column is blank.
(b) Set link devices to be refreshed on the CPU module side.
When the start number is set, the following points are automatically occupied.
B/W: 1024 points (for MELSECNET mode)
4096 points (for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) composite mode)
X/Y: 2048 points
Note that the actual link refresh points are the ones set for "Network range assignment" in the master
station (M) network parameter.
(c) Create a link refresh sample program using the settings in "Step 3" and "Step 4".

144
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 5: Save the program


Confirm the save destination for the link refresh sample program.

(a)

(a) The save destination cannot be specified by the user.


The folder name is created according to "PLC type" and "I/O number" entered in (a) and (b) of "Step 3".
(Example) When the programmable controller type is Q25H, and the I/O number is 200, the folder name
is "Q25H_200".
If the same folder name already exists, it is overwritten.

When creating a link refresh sample program for multiple devices that have the same
programmable controller type and I/O number, move the project to a different location, or
rename and save the created project using GX Developer.

Step 6: Complete the creation of sample program


End the operation of "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".

(a)

(a) Select "Exit" to end the operation of the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".
The "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool" screen will close.

145
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 7: Check the created sample program file


Check the sample program file created by the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".
Open the folder in which the sample program file is stored.
(Example) C:\MELSEC\AQCnvSupport\Q25H_200

Step 8: Open the created sample program


Start GX Developer, and open the sample program created in the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".
(Example) Click Gppw.gpj in "C:\MELSEC\AQCnvSupport\Q25H_200"

Step 9: Check the sample program


Open the created sample program.
Display the statements through the View menu and check the program.
(Example) Display of program and its statements

146
17. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 10: Configure and write the sample program to the programmable controller CPU
Perform the following operations using GX Developer.

(1) Rename and save the sample program project.


(2) In order to use the renamed and saved sample program in the specified Q Series CPU's program file,
select "Project" -> "Copy", and paste the sample program to the "Program" of the specified Q Series CPU.
(3) Select "PLC parameter" -> "Program", and set the "Execute type" of the added program to "Scan".
(4) Write the parameters and the sequence program to the specified Q Series CPU.

147
MEMO

148
APPENDICES

149
Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network (MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H)

Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network


(MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H)

This section lists the compatible CPU types and possible CPU combinations for each network configuration
(MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H).
Appendix 1.1 System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H
(PLC to PLC network)
The following table shows the CPU types that are compatible with MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (PLC
to PLC network) network systems.

Normal station*1
Control station AnU, AnA, AnN,
Q (Q Mode) QnA Q (A Mode) AnS(H)
MELSECNET/10 mode ○ ○ ○ ○*2
MELSECNET/H mode
○ ×*3
Q (Q Mode) (10 Mbps)
MELSECNET/H mode
○ ×*3
(25 Mbps)
QnA(MELSECNET/10 mode) ○ ○ ○ ○*2
AnU, Q (A Mode)
○ ○ ○ ○*2
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
AnA, AnN, AnS(H)*4 ×

○: Compatible ×: Not compatible

*1: Cannot be mixed with a remote I/O station.


*2: Restrictions may apply to the B/W link range depending on the CPU type
AnA : B/W 000 to FFF
AnN, AnS(H) : B/W 000 to 3FF
*3: CPUs other than Q Series CPU (Q mode) cannot be combined because a network system
can be configured with Q Series CPU (Q mode) only.
*4: Cannot be a control station.

150
Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network (MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H)

Appendix 1.2 System configuration for existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) in combination


with Q Series CPU
The following table shows combinations of Q Series CPU with the existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) data link systems.

Local station/Remote I/O station

Q (High QnA, Remote


Master station Q (Basic model) AnN,
Performance AnU, I/O station
Q (Universal model) AnS(H)
model) AnA (AJ72P25)

Q (High Performance model)*1 ×


Q (Basic model)* 1
×
Q (Universal model)*1 ×
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) △* 2
×* 3
○ ×
QnA, AnU,
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) composite △*2 ×*3 ○ ○*4
AnA
MELSECNET △*2 ×*3 ○ ○*4
MELSECNET(ΙΙ)*5 ×
AnN, AnS(H) MELSECNET(ΙΙ) composite* 5
×
MELSECNET △* 2
× ○ ○*4

○:Applicable △:Applicable (with restrictions) ×:Not applicable

*1: Cannot be a master station.


*2: Can be combined with data link system when a local station module (such as
A1SJ71AP23Q) is mounted on the extension base unit (QA1S6�B).
*3: Extension base unit (QA1S6�B) cannot be connected.
*4: A local station and a remote I/O station can be mixed in the data link system.
*5: MELSECNET(ΙΙ) mode and MELSECNET(ΙΙ) composite mode are not supported.

Appendix 1.3 System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H


(remote I/O network)
The following table shows the CPU types that are compatible with MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H
(remote I/O network) network systems. (The listed network modules are for optical loop. For coaxial loop,
coaxial bus, and twisted bus, use their respective modules)

Master station Remote I/O station (compatible network module)


Network module/
CPU QJ72LP25-25 A(1S)J72QLP25 A(1S)J72LP25 A(1S)J72P25
Data link module
Q (Other than basic model) QJ71LP21-25 ○ × ×
Q (Basic model) QJ71LP21-25 × × ×
A(1S)J71QLP21 × ○ ×
QnA
A(1S)J71AP21* 1
× × ○
A(1S)J71LP21 × ○ ×
AnU, Q (A mode)
A(1S)J71AP21* 1
× × ○
A(1S)J71LP21*2 × × ×
AnA, AnN, AnS(H)
A(1S)J71AP21* 1
× × ○

○: Compatible ×: Not compatible

*1: Module for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) data link system.


*2: Compatible with normal station only.

151
Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network (MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H)

Appendix 1.4 System configuration for redundant system network


(1) System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) network systems
The following table shows combinations of MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)
network systems with redundant systems.

Normal station
Q Q4AR
QnA, AnU,
Control station
AnA, AnN,
Redundant Standalone Redundant Standalone AnS(H)

MELSECNET/H mode ○ ○ × × ×
Redundant
MELSECNET/10 mode ○
Q
MELSECNET/H mode ○ ○ × × ×
Standalone
MELSECNET/10 mode ○
Redundant ○
Q4AR
Standalone ○
QnA, AnU* 1
× ○ × ○ ○
AnA, AnN, AnS(H)*2 ×

○: Applicable ×: Not applicable

*1: Cannot be configured for redundant systems.


*2: Cannot be a control station.

(2) System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) network systems
The following table shows combinations of MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network)
network systems with redundant systems. (The network modules listed are optical loop modules. For
coaxial loop, coaxial bus, and twisted bus, replace with the appropriate modules.)
(Example)

Master station Remote I/O station (compatible network module)


CPU Network module QJ72LP25-25 A(1S)J72QLP25 A(1S)J72LP25 A(1S)J72P25
QnPRH QJ71LP21-25 ○ × ×
AJ71LP21* 1

Q4AR
AJ71QLP21 × ○ ×

○: Applicable ×: Not applicable

*1: Cannot be combined with Q4ARCPU.

152
MEMO

153
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.1 Q Series large base unit, Q Series large I/O modules, upgrade tool manufactured
by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
Q A Reference
1 What are the features of Q Series large The slot width is the same as that of the A Series 3. Upgrade to Q Series using
type base unit and Q Series large type base unit. Wiring time can be reduced when Q Series large type base
I/O module? upgrading to Q Series by utilizing the existing unit and I/O modules
wiring along with the terminal block.
2 Are there any restrictions on CPU The following are the applicable CPU types.
types to be used on Q Series large • High Performance Model QCPU
type base unit? • Universal Model QCPU (excluding Q00UJCPU)
• MELSECNET/H remote I/O station
Basic Model QCPU, Process CPU, redundant
CPU system, and multiple CPU configuration are
not applicable.
3 Are CPU modules and power supply Q Series standard CPU modules and power
modules also replaced with modules supply modules are used. They are not modules
dedicated to the Q Series large type dedicated to the Q Series large type base unit.
base unit?
4 Do I need to order any other optional A mounting plate, whose size is the same as the
products to mount modules when existing A Series base unit, and a mounting frame
ordering a Q Series large type base for the Q Series large type I/O module are
unit? included. The only necessary optional products are
blank covers (QG69L).
5 Why is the 8-slot extension base unit The power supply module on the main base unit
(no power supply module required) not supplies power to all the extension base units that
included in the product line up of Q do not require a power supply module. However,
Series large type base unit? the supplied voltage may not reach the specified
value due to voltage drops caused by variants in
the length of the extension cable, number of
extension stages, or current consumption. For this
reason, in the product line up, the maximum
number of slots on an extension base unit
(including standard type extension unit) is 5 slots.

6 What modules are included in the line The following modules are included in the line up.
up of Q Series large type I/O module? • 32-point terminal block 100V AC input module: QX11L
• 32-point terminal block 200V AC input module: QX21L
• 16-point all independent contact output module: QY11AL
• 32-point terminal block contact output module: QY13L
• 32-point terminal block triac output module: QY23L
7 Are there any further development on There is no further development on the Q Series
the Q Series large type base unit and large type base unit.
Q Series large type I/O module? The “QY51PL” large I/O module has been
additionally marketed to replace AY51.
8 What are the specifications of Q Series The specifications are the same as those of the
large type I/O module? existing A Series module.
The number of common points and the rated input
current are the same. Modules can be replaced
without being restrained by the specifications of
external devices.
9 Is the selection of Q Series large type The conversion adapter (upgrade tool)
I/O module smaller than that of the A manufactured by MEE* can replace 16/32-point
Series module? terminal block type I/O modules without the need
of wiring modification.
10 Can a Q Series large type I/O module The Q Series large type base unit can be used in
be combined with the conversion combination with the Q Series large type I/O
adapter manufactured by MEE*? module and conversion adapter. However, the
2-slot type conversion adapter cannot be used on
the Q Series large type base unit.
*MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

154
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Q A Reference
11 How do I select I/O modules when Select a module which has the same specifications as 3. Upgrade to Q Series using
using the conversion adapter the existing A Series module. For example, if the Q Series large type base
manufactured by MEE*? existing A Series module is AX41, select QX41 and use unit and I/O modules
the conversion adapter in order to use the existing
terminal block without wiring modification. (Wiring time
is reduced.)
The specifications may be different than those of the
existing A Series modules because Q Series modules
are used. Check the specifications.

12 What is the optional product required The slot width of the Q Series large type base unit is the
when using the conversion adapter same as that of the A Series base unit. However, blank
manufactured by MEE*? covers (QG69L) are needed to fill the extra spaces that
exist between the mounted Q Series modules.
13 What is the purpose of the blank cover The blank cover fills the spaces between modules and
"QG69L"? provides better protection against vibration and impact.
14 Can network modules and other modules Blank covers "QG69L" are needed to mount
that do not use the conversion adapter network modules and other modules that do not use
manufactured by MEE* be mounted on the the conversion adapter manufactured by MEE*.
Q Series large type base unit?
15 What are the modules that cannot be The following modules cannot be mounted on a Q
mounted on a Q Series large type base Series large type base unit.
unit? (1) A module which occupies 2 slots.
(2) Modules to which a blank cover cannot be
mounted.
• A module whose height is more than 98 mm.
• A module with a bracket on top.
• A module to which Q7BAT-SET is mounted.
Example) Q66AD-DG, Q66DA-G, Q68AD-G,
Q68RD3-G, Q68TD-G-H02,
QJ71WS96 with Q7BAT-SET mounted
(3) When using a conversion adapter (2-slot type)
manufactured by MEE*.
Example) Replace AY51 with two QY50 modules,
use a conversion adapter and utilize
the existing terminal block.
16 How do I use the conversion The conversion adapter, which occupies 2 slots, can be 4.1 Utilize A (Large Type) module
adapter(2-slot type) manufactured by used through the base adapter (upgrade tool) replacement upgrade tool
MEE*? manufactured by MEE*. The base unit used with the •Utilize the 2-slot type conversion
base adapter (upgrade tool) is the Q Series base unit adapter[Use upgrade tool
(standard product). A module which occupies 2 slots (manufactured by Mitsubishi
can also be mounted. Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)]
17 What are the separate usages of Q The upgrade tool manufactured by MEE* uses the Q 4.2 Compatibility of Q Series
Series large base unit and upgrade Series base unit (standard product). large type base unit with
tool manufactured by MEE*? When using the conversion adapter manufactured by the upgrade tool
MEE*, the required number of slots may increase if
modules cannot be mounted because of differences in
the wire sizes.
This issue is solved by selecting a Q Series large type
base unit. On the other hand, using the conversion
adapter (2-slot type), which is part of the upgrade tool
manufactured by MEE*, can also solve the problem.
In addition, a main base unit can be replaced with the Q
Series large type base unit, and an extension base unit
can be replaced with the upgrade tool. (Mixed usage)
Select the products according to the system
configuration.

*MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

155
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Q A Reference
18 What upgrade tools are available to The base adapter that eliminates the need to drill 4.3 Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small
replace from A (Small Type) series to Q base unit mounting holes on the MEE* upgrade Type) module replacement
series? tool, and the conversion adapter that allows the upgrade tool
existing module terminal block to be used without •Utilize the 2-slot type conversion
rewiring are available. adapter[Use upgrade tool
(manufactured by Mitsubishi
Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)]

*MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

156
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.2 Connector/terminal block converter module

Q A Reference
1 I would like to use a base unit other To utilize the existing wires with the solderless 2.1 Replace 32-point terminal
than the Q Series large type base unit. terminals, mount a 32/64-point connector type I/O block type module using
Although the wire size is too big, module on the base unit, and use a connector/terminal block
I would like to keep the existing wiring connector/terminal block converter module. converter module
to take advantage of the solderless The connector/terminal block converter module
terminals. Is there a solution? supports a maximum wire size of 2 mm2.

2 Is user wiring necessary to connect the User wiring is not necessary because a dedicated
connector/terminal block converter cable is provided to connect the connector/terminal
module with the I/O module mounted block converter module with the I/O module. Cable
on the base unit? length of 0.5 and 10 m are available depending on
the control panel.

157
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.3 Replacement of MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) or A2CCPU with Q Series CPU


and CC-Link
Q A Reference
1 Are there I/O modules with the same The following 5 modules are A2C shape modules 7.1 Replace A2CCPU with Q
shape as the existing whose shape and size are the same as those of the Series CPU and CC-Link
MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) module? A2CCPU I/O module. (using A2C shape
• AJ65DBTB1-32D: 24 V DC sink/source CC-Link I/O modules)
common input
• AJ65DBTB1-32T1: 0.5 A transistor output
• AJ65DBTB1-32DT1: 24 V DC input, 0.5 A
transistor output (composite module)
• AJ65DBTB1-32R: Relay output
• AJ65DBTB1-32DR: 24 V DC input, relay output
(composite module)
2 What are the advantages of using a The following are the advantages of using A2C shape
module with the same shape as the I/O modules.
MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) module? • The shape and size of the modules are the same as
those of MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) modules, therefore
they can be installed using the existing installation
holes. New installation holes are not required.
• Modification of the external wiring is not necessary
because the existing terminal block and wiring can
be utilized.
Note that the communication line and power supply
line need to be rewired.
3 Can signal wires of the existing CC-Link dedicated wires are necessary because 7.2 Replace
MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) module be MELSECNET/MINI and CC-Link have different MELSECNET/MINI(-S3)
utilized? specifications. with CC-Link (using
4 Other than A2C shape modules, are The following 3 wiring conversion adapters are wiring conversion
there modules whose existing wiring available to mount the existing 16-point I/O adapter)
can be utilized? module's terminal block to the CC-Link module
without wiring modification.
• For AJ65TB1-16D: A6ADP-1MC16D
• For AJ65TB2-16D: A6ADP-2MC16D
• For AJ65TB1-16T: A6ADP-1MC16T
5 The existing CPU is A2CCPU. It is A2CCPU's I/O modules are distributed control type 7.1 Replace A2CCPU with Q
configured as a standalone and the I/O modules connected through MELSECNET/MINI. Series CPU and CC-Link
modules are connected through the network. Replace the CPU with Q Series CPU and mount a CC-Link (using A2C shape
How do I replace this network? master module. Also replace the network with CC-Link. CC-Link I/O modules)
6 How do I select modules when For selecting modules when replacing the existing Transition from
replacing the network with CC-Link? MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) modules with CC-Link MELSECNET/MINI-S3,A2C
modules, refer to the transition handbook. (I/O) to CC-Link Handbook
7 Analog modules and high-speed Although included in the existing system
counter modules are used with the configuration, analog modules and high-speed
existing MELSECNET/MINI module. counter modules can be replaced because there
Can these modules be replaced with are a wide variety of CC-Link special function
CC-Link modules? modules available.
8 Can the existing program be utilized The X/Y addresses of modules connected to the
without modifications, such as address A2CCPU are determined by their station numbers.
change, when replacing the A2CCPU (The addresses start from X/Y00 at station number 1.)
system with CC-Link? However, when the system is replaced with CC-Link,
the address assigned to the CC-Link remote I/O
module cannot start with X/Y00, because the master
module mounted on the base unit occupies 32 I/O
points. Therefore, program modification is required.
9 8-point occupied modules and 16-point A MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) module occupies 8
occupied modules are mixed in the points per station.
existing system. A CC-Link module occupies 32 points per station,
Can they be replaced without changing which means that 32 points are always occupied
their X/Y addresses? even if an 8-/16-point module is used.
Therefore, except for modules with a total of 32
points (occupies 4 stations) all other address
assignments should be revised.

158
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.4 A0J2 renewal tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

Q A Reference
1 What is the purpose of the A0J2 Wiring time is reduced because the terminal block 5. Replace A0J2(H) systems
renewal tool? along with the external wiring of the existing I/O with Q Series using A0J2
module can be mounted directly. Additionally, new renewal tool
installation holes are unnecessary because the [Use A0J2 renewal tool
installation size is the same as that of the existing (manufactured by
module. Mitsubishi Electric System
& Service Co., Ltd.)]
2 Can A0J2(H) system be replaced A0J2(H) system can be replaced without using the
without using the A0J2 renewal tool? A0J2 renewal tool.
In this method, the existing external wiring needs
to be modified for building block type I/O module.
The following are the precautions.
• The wire size compatible with Q Series I/O
module (terminal block type) is 0.75 mm2.
Existing wire larger than this specified size may
not be utilized.
• Since the Q Series terminal block type I/O
module only has 16 I/O points, the existing
A0J2-E56�� will require at least 4 modules (2
input and 2 output). Therefore, depending on
the number of existing modules, they might not
fit on a single base unit.
• The I/O address assignment changes when
replacing A0J2-E28��, A0J2-E32�, or
A0J2-E24�.
Check the precautions before performing the
replacement.
3 What is the A0J2(H) system's CPU Using the A0J2 renewal tool, the Q Series CPU
replaced with? can replace the A0J2(H) system's CPU.
Additionally, the A0J2 renewal tool can also
upgrade the system to the AnS Series or CC-Link
system.
4 How do I install the CPU? There are 3 types of installation methods
depending on the size and depth of the control
panel.
• Stackable type
When there is enough depth but no extra
installation area.
• Flat mounting type
When there is extra space above the existing
system but not enough depth.
• Standalone type
When there is no extra installation area nor
enough depth.
Select an appropriate installation method
according to the space of the control panel.
Note that when AnSCPU is used to replace the
CPU, only the standalone type can be selected.
5 On the programmable controller side, When replacing the A0J2(H) system with a Q Series
what type of Q Series I/O module system using the A0J2 renewal tool, select an I/O
should be selected? combined module (QX41Y41P) for the programmable
controller side Q Series I/O module regardless of the
existing A0J2 I/O module type.
A0J2 I/O module occupies 64 I/O points (32 input
points, 32 output points) regardless of the module type.
QX41Y41P I/O combined module assigns the first half
of its 32 I/O points to input (X) and the second half to
output (Y).
The I/O address assignment is the same as that of
A0J2 I/O module and thus programs are utilized easily.

159
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Q A Reference
6 Can the same type of I/O module be The A0J2 renewal tool has the following functions. 5. Replace A0J2(H) systems
used on the programmable controller • Conversion of AC input signal to 24 V DC with Q Series using A0J2
side regardless of the A0J2 module signal. renewal tool
types? • Conversion of programmable controller side [Use A0J2 renewal tool
Currently, A0J2-E56AR and transistor output signal to contact output or triac (manufactured by
A0J2-E56DS are used. output. Mitsubishi Electric System
According to the above functions, QX41Y41P can & Service Co., Ltd.)]
replace the module on the programmable
controller side. The selected interface module for
the renewal tool should be of the same type as the
existing I/O module.
7 Does the user need to make a cable to The user does not need to make a cable.
connect QX41Y41P with the A0J2 Dedicated cables are available and the length
renewal tool? (0.35 m, 1 m, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m) can be selected
according to the control panel's configuration. Note
that 2 cables (for input and output) are required
per module.
8 Can the renewal tool be used for a Yes, MELSECNET/MINI compact type I/O module 5.3 Replace MELSECNET/MINI
MELSECNET/MINI compact type I/O has the same shape as the A0J2 I/O module and compact type remote I/O
module? can be replaced with a CC-Link module. modules with CC-Link using
A0J2 renewal tool
9 How many A0J2 renewal tool models 15 models. 5. Replace A0J2(H) systems
are available? The A0J2 renewal tool is not compatible with A0J2 with Q Series using A0J2
I/O module's DC source input and source type renewal tool
transistor output. [Use A0J2 renewal tool
(manufactured by
10 Does a base adapter need to be The following programmable controller fixing frame Mitsubishi Electric System
ordered separately from the A0J2 set is included as standard for a stackable type & Service Co., Ltd.)]
renewal tool? and flat mounting type.
• Mounting plate to fix programmable controllers
(for 3 slots)
• Programmable controller mounting frame
• Base adapter to mount the renewal tool
• Terminal block for power supply wiring
Order a base adapter separately for a standalone type.
11 Does the A0J2 renewal tool have the The A0J2 renewal tool and all the existing I/O modules
same installation size as that of all have the same installation size.
existing I/O modules?
12 The existing configuration consists of A 2-level configuration is possible with the A0J2
the A0J2-E56DR on the bottom and renewal tool for A0J2-E56��. Modules can be
A0J2-E32A on top. Is replacement with replaced while preserving the existing configuration,
a 2-level configuration possible if the even if the top level module size is bigger.
A0J2-E32A and A0J2-E56�� have the Additionally, the 2-level mounting bracket, which
same size? holds the A0J2-E56�� on the top level, is no longer
needed after the replacement, opening up extra
room in terms of depth.
Note that A0J2-E28�� cannot be used in a 2-level
configuration.

13 When same size modules are stacked The A0J2 renewal tool does not have operation
in a 2-level configuration, is the I/O indicator LED. Check the operation status through
operation indicator LED hidden from the LED on the I/O module on the programmable
view? controller side.
14 Is there an A0J2 renewal tool for The A0J2 renewal tool is for I/O modules only.
special function modules, such as
analog modules?
15 How do I replace A0J2 special function Replace the special function modules with
modules? corresponding Q Series modules. Since
specifications and functions are different,
programs need to be revised.

160
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Q A Reference
16 The mounting plate to fix A mounting plate for 5-slot base unit is available as 5. Replace A0J2(H) systems
programmable controller is equipped an option. with Q Series using A0J2
with 3 slots as standard. What is a Consider adopting this plate when the number of renewal tool
solution when 3 slots are not enough? slots is insufficient. [Use A0J2 renewal tool
(manufactured by
17 The existing A0J2(H) system contains Replace with the Q Series CPU.
Mitsubishi Electric System
a CPU with link functions. How do I To keep the existing network configuration, add a
& Service Co., Ltd.)]
replace the network? QA1S6�B extension base unit, and use
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station module "A1SJ71A�
23Q".
To replace the network with MELSECNET/10,
carefully consider the entire network configuration
(other station CPU model names, parameter
settings, etc.).
18 What are the precautions when using The A0J2 renewal tool needs a 24 V DC external
the A0J2 renewal tool? power supply.
Power supply modules with built-in 24 V DC
service power supply, such as the Q62P, can be
used, but the power supply capacity may be
insufficient depending on the renewal tool. Check
each module’s external power supply capacity on
the instruction manual to avoid such problem.
Install a power supply device externally when the
power supplied to the renewal tool is insufficient or
when a power supply module that does not contain
a 24 V DC service power supply is used.
19 Who should I contact about technical For the A0J2 renewal tool, please contact your MELSEC-A/QnA Series
support on the A0J2 renewal tool? local Mitsubishi sales office or representative. Transition Guide
20 When replacing A0J2 with Q Series It is possible to use modified programs but its CPU
CPU, a programming tool such as type needs to be changed. Please contact your
A6GPP does not exist. local Mitsubishi sales office or representative to
Do all data need to be reprogrammed? change the program's CPU type.

161
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.5 Other convenient modules


(1) High-speed counter module (QD62-H01, QD62-H02)
Q A Reference
1 What are the differences between Q The following are the replacement dedicated 11. Replace high-speed
Series replacement dedicated high-speed counter modules. counter modules
high-speed counter module AD61(S1) • QD62-H01: For replacing AD61 (AD61(S1)) with Q Series
and Q Series standard high-speed • QD62-H02: For replacing AD61S1 modules
counter module? The input filtering system and the counting speed
of Q Series replacement dedicated modules are
the same as those of AD61(S1). Therefore,
modules can be replaced without being restrained
by the specifications of existing pulse generators
(e.g. an encoder).
2 Does the sequence program need to The sequence program needs to be revised due to
be modified when using a replacement the following differences with AD61(S1).
dedicated high-speed counter module? ・Counting range
(24-bit unsigned value -> 32-bit signed value)
・Buffer memory address

(2) DC input modules compatible with 6mA rated input current (QX41-S2, QX81-S2)
Q A Reference
1 The rated input current for the A Series Modules with 6 mA rated input current are 12. Use DC input modules
input modules AX41 and AX81 is 10 mA; available. with 6mA rated input
however, it decreases to 4 mA for the Q Using the following modules, external resistors are current (QX41-S2,
Series input modules QX41 and QX81. no longer required. QX81-S2)
The lower rated input current may hinder • QX41-S2: 24 V DC positive common, 40-pin
the modules from detecting sensor connector type
inputs. Is there a Q Series input module • QX81-S2: 24 V DC negative common, 37-pin
equivalent to the AX41? D-sub connector type
2 The input module with 6 mA rated input Select Q Series QX41-S2 or QX81-S2, and mount
current is a connector type module. the module to the Q Series large type base unit
Wiring modification is required when it using a conversion adapter manufactured by
is used to replace a terminal block type MEE*.
32-point input module, such as AX41. The terminal block of the existing A Series module
Is there a way to replace the module can be utilized without wiring modification.
without wiring modification?
3 Can a module with 6 mA rated input The pin array of A Series connector module is the
current be used without wiring same as that of Q Series connector type module.
modification when replacing A Series The connector of the existing A Series module can
connector type module? be utilized for the replacement.

*MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

162
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

(3) MELSECNET/H network module (Twisted bus type: QJ71NT11B)


Q A Reference
1 When upgrading to Q Series, can the A twisted bus type MELSECNET/H network 8.2 Upgrade to
MELSECNET/H network utilize the module is available. MELSECNET/H network
existing MELSECNET/B cables? The cable used for the twisted bus type module system utilizing existing
has the same specification as the MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/B twisted
twisted pair cable. Therefore, the existing cable pair cable
can be utilized.
2 Do the terminals of the existing twisted The terminals need to be modified. Bar solderless
pair cables need to be modified? terminals are required because the
MELSECNET/B module uses screw type terminal
blocks while MELSECNET/H module (twisted bus
type) uses spring clamp terminal blocks.
3 While I can replace the current network The MELSECNET/H twisted bus system is
with MELSECNET/H twisted bus compatible with the Q Series CPUs only. CPUs
system, I cannot replace all CPUs at other than Q Series CPU cannot be mixed in the
once. Can I partially upgrade the configuration.
system to use Q Series CPUs?
4 Are there restrictions on the distance The distance between stations and the overall
between stations or the overall distance are the same as those of
distance when replacing MELSECNET/B.
MELSECNET/B? The existing network configuration can be replaced
without modification.
5 Can a CC-Link system use the same The MELSECNET/H twisted bus system can be
cable as a MELSECNET/H twisted bus connected with CC-Link cables.
system? Therefore, MELSECNET/H twisted bus systems
and CC-Link systems can share the same cable.
6 Can the existing cables for remote I/O MELSECNET/H twisted bus system is only
network be utilized for MELSECNET/H applicable to PLC to PLC network.
remote I/O network? Replace the remote I/O network with an optical
loop or coaxial bus system.

163
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.6 QA extension base unit and QA conversion adapter

Q A Reference
1 Can I only replace the CPU module Continuing use of the existing A Series modules is 6. Utilize existing A Series
with a Q Series CPU and continue possible if a QA extension base unit (QA65B/68B), modules
using the existing A Series modules? which is used to mount A Series modules, is
connected to the Q Series CPU.

2 Are there restrictions on the mountable Network and communication modules cannot be • 6.1 Use A/QnA (Large Type)
modules? mounted. Replace these modules with Q Series Series QA6�B
ones and mount them on a Q Series main base extension base unit
unit or Q Series extension base unit. • QA65B/QA68B Extension
The following are the modules which need to be Base Unit User’s
replaced. Manual(IB-0800158)
• MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/B
(e.g. AJ71AP21, AJ71AT21B)
• MELSECNET/10 network modules
(e.g. AJ71LP21, AJ71QLP21)
• Computer link modules
(e.g. AJ71UC24, AJ71QC24)
• Ethernet interface modules
(e.g. AJ71E71, AJ71QE71)
• CC-Link master/local modules
(e.g. AJ61BT11, AJ61QBT61)
3 Can I continue using special function Continued use of modules that are unrelated to
modules such as positioning modules network and communication is possible.
and analog modules? Example) Positioning modules (e.g. AD71, AD75)
Analog modules (e.g. A68AD, A616AD)
Note that there may be restrictions on the number
of mountable modules.
4 Which Q Series CPUs are compatible The QA extension base unit is only compatible with
with the QA extension base unit? the High Performance Model QCPU or Universal
Model QCPU (first five digits of serial No. “13102”
or higher).
Basic Model QCPUs cannot be used.

5 Up to how many stages can a QA A total of 7 stages is possible including QA • QA65B/QA68B Extension
extension base unit be connected? extension base units and Q Series extension base Base Unit User’s
units. Manual(IB-0800158)
Note that there is a restriction on the connecting • QA6ADP QA Conversion
order when QA� extension base unit and QA Adapter Module User’s
conversion adapter are used. Manual(IB-0800402)
6 Can extension cables for A Series The existing A Series extension cables cannot be QA65B/QA68B Extension
(standard product) be utilized? used. Base Unit User’s
Use the Q Series extension cable "QC�B". Manual(IB-0800158)

7 A GOT is connected to the existing When a QA extension base unit is connected, the
system by bus connection. GOT cannot use bus connection. Switch to other
Can the GOT be connected to a QA connection methods, such as direct connection
extension base unit? and computer link connection.
8 Can the existing A Series base unit be The existing A Series base unit can be used as an 6.2 Use QA conversion
used as an equivalent to the QA equivalent to the QA extension base unit without adapter module to utilize
extension base unit? modification by mounting a QA conversion adapter existing I/O modules and
"QA6ADP". Note that the restrictions on mountable extension base units with
modules are the same as those on the AQ Q Series CPU (Use QA
extension base unit. conversion adapter)

164
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Q A Reference
9 Can the existing A Series main base The existing A Series main base unit cannot be 6.2 Use QA conversion
unit also be used as an equivalent to used as an equivalent to the QA extension base adapter module to utilize
the QA base unit? unit. To continue using the modules mounted on existing I/O modules and
the existing A Series main base unit, connect a QA extension base units with
extension base unit and transfer the modules. Q Series CPU (Use QA
conversion adapter)
10 Are there any QA extension base units QA1S65B and QA1S68B are QA extension base MELSEC-A/QnA Series
compatible with AnS Series modules? units compatible with AnS Series modules. Transition Guide

11 What are the restrictions on modules Network and communication modules cannot be
which can be mounted on a QA used. (Same restriction as A Series QA extension
extension base unit compatible with base unit)
AnS Series modules?
12 What are the restrictions on using a QA The QA conversion adapter "QA6ADP" cannot be QA6ADP QA Conversion
extension base unit compatible with used with a QA extension base unit that is Adapter Module User’s
AnS Series modules? compatible with AnS Series modules, but can be Manual(IB-0800402)
used with the A Series QA extension base unit.
13 What is the correct order of connection The following is the order of connection for QA
when using QA extension base units extension base units.
and QA conversion adapter 1) Q Series main base unit
(QA6ADP)? 2) Q Series extension base unit
3) Small type QA extension base unit
4) Large type QA extension base unit, A Series
extension base unit with mounted QA6ADP
Set the QA extension base unit and QA conversion
adapter's stage number according to the order of
connection.
14 The extension base unit that does not The QA conversion adapter can be used on the
require a power supply module, A58B, extension base unit A58B.
is connected to the existing system. The QA conversion adapter can be used on the
Can the QA conversion adapter extension base unit A58B. However, the supplied
QA6ADP be used on this extension voltage might not reach the specified voltage,
base unit? because the extended cable length may cause a
voltage drop. In this case, replace the extension
base unit with QA6�B, an extension base unit that
includes a power supply module. The voltage drop
can be calculated according to the instructions
founds in the QCPU user’s manual.
15 Is the QA extension base unit needed Local station modules are available to connect with 10. Replace one of A Series
when the CPU is replaced with a Q MELSECNET(ΙΙ) when replacing the CPU with a Q stations with Q Series
Series CPU but the existing Series CPU while retaining the existing while maintaining
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) network is not MELSECNET(ΙΙ) network. MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
upgraded? A1SJ71AP23Q, A1SJ71AR23Q, A1SJ71AT23BQ
These modules are mounted on the small type
QA1S extension base unit because they have the
same size as AnS Series modules.
16 The number of base units increases In Q Series parameter settings, start I/O number 6.4 Utilize existing A (Large
when the main base unit is replaced can be assigned to each slot. The start addresses Type) or AnS (Small
with a Q Series base unit. The program can be assigned according to the existing Type) module without
requires significant modification addresses of the A Series modules in order to changing I/O addresses
because the X/Y addresses of the avoid program modification. (Program modification
existing modules changed. Is it time can be reduced) .
possible to avoid address
modification?

165
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Q A Reference
17 What QA1S extension base units The following QA1S extension base units are 6.3 Use AnS/QnAS (Small
compatible with the A/QnAS (Small compatible with the A/QnAS (Small Type) Series. Type) Series QA1S6�B
Type) Series are available? • QA1S65B/QA1S68B extension base unit
(with power supply module mounted) 10. Replace one of A Series
• QA1S51B stations with Q Series
(without power supply module mounted) while maintaining
MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

166
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.7 A-A1S module conversion adapter

Q A Reference
1 An additional module is needed when Use the "A-A1S module conversion adapter" to • 13. Use AnS Series
modifying a system containing A Series mount AnS Series modules on the existing A modules as spare parts
CPUs, but A Series modules have Series main/extension base unit. for existing A Series
been discontinued. What can be • To mount I/O modules: A1ADP-XY modules
done? • To mount special function modules: A1ADP-SP • A-A1S Module Conversion
Mount the AnS Series modules on this conversion Adapter User’s
adapter then mount the adapter on the A Series Manual(IB-0800352)
base unit.
2 In the case of a module failure, can AnS Series modules can be used as substitution. Transition from
AnS Series modules in combination However, note that, specifications and functions MELSEC-A/QnA(Large Type)
with the A-A1S module conversion may differ depending on the module. Series to AnS/Q2AS Small
adapter substitute the A Series For example: Type Series Handbook
module? 1) A Series I/O modules have terminal blocks of
up to 32 points. AnS Series I/O modules have
terminal blocks of up to 16 points only.
2) Computer link module changes from 2
channels to 1 channel.
3) The rated input current is different.
Select a module after comparing the specifications
and functions.
3 How can I add more modules when Use CC-Link system. MELSEC-A/QnA Series
there is no free slot available? Mount an AnS Series CC-Link master module Transition Guide
using an A-A1S module conversion adapter, and
connect the modules by CC-Link.
4 Only the CPU has been replaced with The A-A1S module conversion adapter can also be • A-A1S Module Conversion
Q Series CPU, and use of the existing used on the QA extension base unit. Adapter User’s
I/O modules is continued through the Check the specifications and functions before use. Manual(IB-0800352)
QA extension base unit. Can I use the • Transition from
A-A1S module conversion adapter? MELSEC-A/QnA(Large
Type)Series to Q Series
Handbook(Fundamentals)
• Transition from
MELSEC-A/QnA(Large
Type) Series to AnS/Q2AS
Small Type Series
Handbook

167
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.8 MELSECNET(ΙΙ) Replacement


(1) Converting to QCPU while keeping the existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) (MELSECTNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module)
Q A Reference
1 How can some stations in the existing Use the following modules to replace CPUs in a 10. Replace one of A Series
MELSECNET (ΙΙ) be replaced without MELSECNET(ΙΙ) network with Q Series CPUs. stations with Q Series
changing the network? • A1SJ71AP23Q: compatible with while maintaining
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) optical loop (SI) MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
• A1SJ71AR23Q: compatible with
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) coaxial loop
• A1SJ71AT23BQ: compatible with
MELSECNET/B
These are local station modules.
2 Is a special base unit required to use Use one of the extension base units compatible
local station modules? with AnS Series modules (QA1S65B/QA1S68B)
because the local station modules have the same
size as AnS Series modules.
When using a QA extension base unit compatible
with A Series modules (QA65B/QA68B), use the
A-A1S module conversion adapter (A1ADP-SP) to
mount local station modules.

3 Can a master station CPU be replaced Q Series CPU cannot be the master station of a 10.2 Replace A Series master
with Q Series CPU? MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B network. station with Q Series
When upgrading the master station to Q Series
CPU, it is necessary to set one of the existing
ACPU local stations as the master station. While
the station numbers are changed, the B/W
assignment in network parameters can be set
according to the existing configuration in order to
avoid modification to the program.
4 Can MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or Q Series CPU cannot be the master station of a 10. Replace one of A Series
MELSECNET/B continue to be used MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B network. stations with Q Series
when all the stations are upgraded to At least one A Series CPU station needs to remain. while maintaining
Q Series CPU? When replacing all CPUs with Q Series CPUs, MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
replace local station modules with MELSECNET/H
or MELSECNET/10 modules.
5 MELSECNET(ΙΙ) and MELSECNET/B Link refresh for local station modules is set using 17. Create a sample program
are not listed under network type in Q FROM/TO instructions. Network parameter setting for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or
Series CPU network parameter. How is not necessary. MELSECNET/B link
do I configure the refresh parameters refresh using A/QnA -> Q
and other network settings? conversion support tool
6 Do I need to create a new program to A program to perform the link refresh is needed.
perform network refresh using The "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool", which is
FROM/TO instructions? provided at no additional cost, includes a function
to automatically create a sample program.
This function automatically generates a compatible
program after the user enters the current network
specifications (existence of second half settings in
each station's send range, transient
communication settings, etc.).

168
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

(2) Upgrading the network to MELSECNET/10 while partially keeping the existing ACPUs
Q A Reference
1 Are there any advantages to replacing By replacing the network with MELSECNET/10 • 8.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
only the network with MELSECNET/10 first, any station can be replaced with Q Series coaxial loop with
and not upgrading the CPU? modules without being restrained by the network MELSECNET/10 coaxial
configuration. bus system while
retaining existing A Series
2 When replacing only the network, can To replace the network with MELSECNET/10, at least
CPUs
the existing CPU types remain the one station needs to be able to become the control
• 9. Replace MELSECNET
same? station. CPUs that can be a MELSECNET/10 control
containing a remote I/O
station are AnUCPUs, QnACPUs, and QCPUs.
station with
3 Can the optical cable be used without The optical cable can be used without modification MELSECNET/H
modification when the network is when the network is replaced with MELSECNET/10. • Transition from
replaced with MELSECNET/10? However, note that, the distance between stations MELSEC-A/QnA(Large
should be within 500m or 200m depending on the Type) Series to Q Series
cable type. Handbook(Network
When the distance between the station is long, check Modules)
the cable type.
4 Can the coaxial cable be used without Q Series uses coaxial bus instead of coaxial loop
modification when the network is cable. The maximum overall distance is 500m (2.5
replaced with MELSECNET/10? Km when a repeater is used). Check the overall
distance and if it satisfies the specification, use
one of the existing cables to connect the modules.
5 Can MELSECNET/10 modules be MELSECNET/10 modules can be mounted next to
mounted next to an AnNCPU or an AnNCPU or AnACPU if it is a normal station.
AnACPU? The following conditions should be satisfied in order
to mount MELSECNET/10 modules on the base unit.
• Empty slots are available.
• 32 controllable I/O points are available in the
corresponding CPU.
6 Which MELSECNET/10 modules can The following are the A Series compatible
be mounted next to an AnNCPU or MELSECNET/10 modules.
AnACPU? AJ71LP21: compatible with optical cable
AJ71BR11: compatible with coaxial bus
There is an AJ71LR21 module compatible with coaxial
loop, but a coaxial loop network cannot be configured
because the Q Series CPU is not compatible.
7 There are no type setting in the The MELSECNET/10 modules mounted next to
AnNCPU or AnACPU network the AnNCPU or AnACPU are equivalent to a
parameter. MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station (with link parameter
How do I configure the network settings set for the first half).
settings? Network parameter settings are not required when
the AnNCPU or AnACPU is a local station.
8 Can a MELSECNET/10 module be According to MESLECNET(ΙΙ) specifications, the
added next to an AnNCPU or AnACPU only acceptable combination for a CPU is to be a
that is currently part of a local station in the second tier and the master station
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) network in the third tier. Therefore, the additional
configuration? MELSECNET/10 module cannot be mounted if the
existing CPU satisfies one of the following conditions.
• It is a combination of a local station in the second
tier and the master station in the third tier
• It is a local station in the second tier
Note that, if a MELSECNET/10 module is added to
the second-tier master station, it may become a
third-tier master station. In this case, the existing
network parameter assignment may not be applicable.

169
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Q A Reference
9 The existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/10 does not allow normal stations • 8.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
MELSECNET/B systems contain a (equivalent to local stations) to mix with remote I/O coaxial loop with
combination of local and remote I/O stations within the same network. Separate the MELSECNET/10 coaxial
stations. Can this network be network into a PLC to PLC network and a remote I/O bus system while
upgraded? network. retaining existing A Series
CPUs
• 9. Replace MELSECNET
containing a remote I/O
station with
MELSECNET/H
• Transition from
MELSEC-A/QnA (Large
Type) Series to Q Series
Handbook (Network
Modules)
10 (Follow-up question to No. 9) Yes, modification of the cable installation is 9. Replace MELSECNET
Is modification of the cable installation required to separate the network into PLC to PLC containing a remote I/O
required to separate the network into network and remote I/O network. station with
two? If it is difficult to modify the cable installation, MELSECNET/H
replace remote I/O stations with normal stations
(equivalent to local stations).
11 The existing network parameters Yes. If the first and second half of MELSECNET(ΙΙ) Transition from
contain the settings of the first half and were set in the existing network parameter MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type)
second half of MELSECNET(ΙΙ). settings, reset each station's send range at the Series to Q Series Handbook
Can the network be replaced while control station after replacing the network with (Network Modules)
maintaining the existing settings? MELSECNET/10, and set each station's "station
inherent parameters".
However, note that the program may need to be
modified because setting of "station inherent
parameters" is not possible if network parameters
were not set for the AnNCPU or AnACPU.
12 Can a MELSECNET/10 module be A MELSECNET/10 module can be added since
added to the third-tier AnUCPU or AnUCPU or QnACPU controls MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
QnACPU master station in an and MELSECNET/10 as separate networks.
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) three-tier system?
13 The CPU of the remote I/O network's The remote I/O network whose master station is Q
master station is replaced with a Q Series CPU becomes the MELSECNET/H remote
Series CPU. I/O network.
Can the I/O modules of the existing Including link modules of remote I/O stations, only
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B Q Series modules can be used for the
remote I/O station be replaced without MELSECNET/H remote I/O network.
modification? While module changes are required, the existing
external wiring can be utilized through the Q
Series large type base unit. (Replacement time
can be reduced.)

170
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

(3) Add a relay station to gradually upgrade to MELSECNET/10


Q A Reference
1 What is a function of the relay station? A relay station is used to share data between the • MELSEC-A/QnA Series
existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B and the Transition Guide
new MELSECNET/10 when the CPUs are partially • Transition from
replaced with Q Series CPUs, and when the network MELSEC-A/QnA (Large
is partially replaced with MELSECNET/10. Type) Series to Q Series
Handbook (Network
2 What are the system configurations of The following are the configurations of the relay station. Modules)
the relay station? • CPUs which support both MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or
MELSECNET/B and MELSECNET/10
A2US(H)CPU(-S1), Q2AS(H)CPU(-S1)
• Network modules compatible with the existing
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) and MELSECNET/B
A1SJ71AP(AR/AT)21(B), etc
• Network module compatible with MELSECNET/10
A1SJ71(Q)LP21/(Q)BR11
3 Do I need to order separate modules to Yes. Please order the "Gateway Set", which
configure the system? includes the modules required to configure the
system. All required modules can be purchased by
specifying the cable types used by the existing
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B and
MELSECNET/10.
4 Do I need to configure special settings The following modifications to the sequence program
or create programs for the relay are necessary because MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or
station? MELSECNET/B and MELSECNET/10's link refresh
target B/W cannot have overlapping device numbers.
• Transfer the B/W devices that relay from the
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B side to
MELSECNET/10 side
• Transfer the B/W devices that relay from the
MELSECNET/10 side to MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or
MELSECNET/B side
5 What are the restrictions on B/W points The range of B/W points to be relayed is the B/W
to be relayed? range assigned to the relay station when setting
each station's send range.
Not all points will be relayed if there is a large
amount of B/W points. Priorities should be
reconsidered to narrow down the relay data.
6 Can multiple CPUs be simultaneously It is possible if each station's send range is
replaced with Q Series CPUs using assigned sequentially and the total number of
only one relay station? points is within the number of points that can be
assigned to one single station. Restrictions (e.g.
cannot relay any of the B/W points assigned to
each station's send range) apply if the above two
conditions are not satisfied.
7 Is cable installation modification When gradually replacing the existing CPUs and
required when gradually replacing the MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B with Q Series
existing CPUs and MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or CPUs and MELSECNET/10, cable installation
MELSECNET/B with Q Series CPUs modification is required on both MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or
and MELSECNET/10? MELSECNET/B side and MELSECNET/10 side.
8 Does the program of the relay station The program of the relay station needs to be revised
need to be revised when gradually because the numbers and range of B/W to be
replacing the existing CPUs and relayed are changed.
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B Furthermore, the network parameters of the master
with Q Series CPUs and station and control station of both MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
MELSECNET/10? or MELSECNET/B side and MELSECNET/10 side
need to be reviewed and reset.
9 A relay station is useful when the Use local station data link modules for stations
number of stations to be replaced is replaced with Q Series CPU and perform data link
small, but when the number of stations is using the existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) until all A Series
large, it seems difficult to relay stations. CPUs in the existing network are replaced with Q
Is there another method? Series CPUs.

171
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.9 A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Q A Reference
1 What are the functions of the The following are the two functions of A/QnA -> Q • MELSEC-A/QnA Series
conversion support tool when replacing conversion support tool. Transition Guide
A/QnA Series modules with Q Series (1) Programs of the existing A/QnA Series or • A/QnA -> Q Conversion
modules? AnS/QnAS Series are compared with the Support Tool Operation
programs converted for Q Series CPU, locations Guide
which could not be automatically converted are
extracted, and methods to correct the programs
are displayed.
(2) A sample program which is required for the link
refresh of local station modules of
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B is
automatically created.
2 (Follow-up question to No. 1) The A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool is not a
Does "locations which could not be tool that corrects programs.
automatically converted are extracted, It compares the programs of the existing A/QnA
and methods to correct the programs Series or AnS/QnAS Series with the converted Q
are displayed" mean this function Series CPU program, extracts unconverted
automatically corrects programs? program that may still exist, and provides guidance
on how to convert the remaining parts that were
not automatically converted.
This is a tool to reduce program correction time
after the replacement.
3 How does the conversion support tool When modules are replaced, the A/QnA -> Q
support the replacement of special conversion support tool appends a message
function modules? whenever the preset "special function module's
X/Y numbers" and the FROM/TO instructions are
used in the program, to indicate that revision may
be needed.
In addition, the support tool displays the pages of
the transition handbook corresponding to the
specifications and functions of A/QnA Series and
AnS/QnAS Series special function modules and
their appropriate replacement candidates. The
following information are available.
• Comparison of specifications and functions
• Comparison of X/Y assignments
• Comparison of the buffer memory
4 Does the A/QnA -> Q conversion The A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool can only
support tool support all existing A replace A Series and AnS/QnAS Series CPUs that
Series CPU types? are compatible with GX Developer.
AnNCPU, AnACPU, AnUCPU,
QnACPU, AnS(H)CPU,
A2US(H)CPU(-S1), Q2AS(H)CPU(-S1),
A0J2HCPU, A2CCPU
5 Does the A/QnA -> Q conversion The A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool only
support tool support all Q Series CPU supports conversion to High Performance Model
types? QCPUs.
If the replacement CPU is a Universal Model QCPU,
first use the A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool to
temporarily convert to High Performance Model
QCPU.
Apply the recommended measures and change the
program's CPU type to Universal Model QCPU.
6 Do the extracted results and displayed Some sequence instructions apply to High TECHNICAL
contents apply to the unsupported Performance Model QCPU but not to Universal BULLETIN(FA-A-0001)
QCPUs? Model QCPU (most of these instructions have low
usage rate).
For details, refer to the technical bulletin.
Special function modules apply to either CPU types
because they share the same replacement modules.

172
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Q A Reference
7 Can the extracted results and Yes. Programs can be directly modified while A/QnA -> Q Conversion
correction methods be saved as a file? confirming with the extracted results and Support Tool Operation
recommended correction methods, which are Guide
saved as files.

8 How are the MELSECNET(ΙΙ) and A link refresh sample program is automatically • 17. Create a sample program
MELSECNET/B local station modules' created by setting the A/QnA -> Q conversion for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or
link refresh sample programs created? support tool according to the existing network MELSECNET/B link
parameter settings. refresh using A/QnA -> Q
Link refresh will begin once the sample program is conversion support tool
written to the QCPU using one of the methods • A/QnA -> Q Conversion
listed below. Support Tool Operation
(1) Write the sample program to the QCPU as a Guide
separate program file.
(2) Combine the sample program with the user
created program and write it to the QCPU.
9 (Follow-up to question to No. 8) The following are referred to as "the existing
What are the settings referred to as network parameter settings".
"the existing network parameter • Second half settings for each station's send range
settings"? • Three-tier system configuration
• Transient communication
Check the status of the existing master station's
network parameter settings and set the above
settings accordingly.
10 Several MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or A link refresh sample program is automatically MELSECNET,
MELSECNET/B local station modules created even when MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B Local Station
are mounted to increase the B/W send MELSECNET/B local station modules are Data Link Module User's
points per CPU. In this case, can a link mounted. Manual(SH-080670ENG)
refresh sample program be created However, the sample program needs to be
automatically? modified because refresh executions will overlap.
For details on FROM/TO instructions and the
relevant buffer memory addresses, refer to the
local station module's manual.

Appendix 2.10 Replacement of Q4AR redundant system with Q Series redundant system

Q A Reference
1 What are the precautions when Q4ARCPU and QnPRHCPU redundant systems Transition of CPUs in
replacing redundant modules? have different specifications and functions. MELSEC Redundant System
For the precautions on replacing the redundant Handbook (Transition from
system, please contact your local Mitsubishi sales Q4ARCPU to QnPRHCPU)
office or representative.

2 Where can I find replacement The "transition handbook" includes information


information such as comparison of such as comparison of specifications/functions,
specifications and functions? replacement module selection help, and
precautions.

173
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.11 Technical support for replacing A/QnA Series with Q Series

Q A Reference
1 What information do you need when I We can propose replacement methods or
contact you? recommend replacement models if you provide us
with the following information.
(1) Replacement plan
• Simultaneous or gradual replacement
• Maintain the current system or integrate
newer products -
(2) Current system configuration (outline is accepted)
• List of modules in the existing system
• Documents providing understanding of the
entire network system configuration
• Network parameter settings
(3) Usage status of special function modules

2 Isn't it easy to select replacement Replacement modules cannot be determined simply


modules for the existing A Series based on the existing module names because
modules based on the current module several other factors should be considered.
names? Taking I/O modules as an example, several factors,
as shown below, should be considered to find a
suitable replacement for the system.
(1) When utilizing the existing external wiring
• Use or not use the Q Series large type base
unit and Q Series large type I/O modules
• Use or not use the upgrade tool manufactured
by MEE*
• Use or not use the connector/terminal block -
converter module externally
(2) When using new wiring (not utilizing existing
external wiring)
• Connect or not connect new wires directly to
modules
• Use or not use the connector/terminal block
converter module externally
(3) Module specification comparison
• Common points comparison
(8 points/common -> 16 points /common)
• Rated input current comparison
(A Series: 10 mA -> Q Series: Approximately
4 mA)
• Maximum load current
3 The existing A Series CPU's model "P21" at the end of the model name indicates that
name ends with "P21". What type of Q the A Series CPU has built-in MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
Series CPU would be a suitable data link function. The network configuration and
replacement? network parameter settings of the master station -
should be checked because replacing this CPU
will affect the entire network.

*MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

174
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Q A Reference
4 (Follow-up question to No. 3) The network of the existing A Series CPU is either
Why does the replacement of CPU MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B, neither of
with the data link function become which are compatible with Q Series CPUs. Several
such a large-scale replacement? factors, including the ones listed below, should be
considered when replacing a system.
(1) When replacing the MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or
MELSECNET/B network with MELSECNET/10
network
• All network modules on the existing network
stations need to be changed -
• Restrictions may apply depending on the
network parameter settings
• Local stations and remote I/O stations cannot
be mixed
(2) When communicating in the existing network
using local station module (AJ71AP23Q)
• A QA(1S) extension base unit is required.
• A link refresh program is required.
The replacement should be performed after
considering the entire network configuration.
5 "AJ71PT32-S3" module is in the "AJ71PT32-S3" is a MELSECNET/MINI(-S3)
current system but its purpose is master module.
unknown. What should this module be MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) is a remote I/O network
replaced with? that distributes I/O modules and analog modules to
their respective required locations and connects
them with dedicated communication lines.
-
CC-Link is recommended for the replacement. All
connected modules including the master module
need to be replaced.
Model names of all modules connected to
MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) need to be checked.
(It is not possible to replace only the master
module.)

*MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

175
Appendix 2 Replacement of A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules

Appendix 2.12 Technical information for replacing A/QnA Series with Q Series

Q A Reference
1 Is there a catalog that introduces MELSEC-A/QnA Series Transition Guide
replacement Q Series modules for the introduces a wide selection of modules to easily -
A/QnA Series? replace A/QnA Series with Q Series.
2 Catalogs only describe individual MELSEC-A/QnA Series Transition Examples (this
upgrade products. document) contains usage examples of the
Is there a document which introduces replacement modules introduced in the Transition
-
usage and replacement examples of Guide and network replacement examples. Use
these upgrade products? this handbook as a reference to resolve
replacement issues.
3 Is there a document containing a Transition handbook MELSEC-A/QnA Series
comparison between the existing A (1) Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Transition Guide
Series modules and their replacement Series to Q Series Handbook
modules? (Fundamentals)
(Intelligent Function Modules)
(Network Modules)
(Communications)
(2) Transition from MELSEC-A0J2H Series to Q
Series Handbook
(3) Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3, A2C(I/O) to
CC-Link Handbook
(4) Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to CC-Link/LT
Handbook
(5) Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA Large Type Series
to AnS/Q2AS Small Type Series Handbook
(6) Transition of CPUs in MELSEC Redundant System
Handbook (Transition from Q4ARCPU to
QnPRHCPU)

Transition handbooks for each product division


such as CPU, I/O module, special function module,
and network are available.
Refer to the corresponding handbook according to
the current system configuration.

4 (Follow-up question to No.3) TECHNICAL BULLETIN


Is there any other technical information (1) Repair acceptance of discontinued models
to assist with the replacement (FA-A-0049)
procedure? (2) Procedures for Replacing Positioning Module
AD71 with QD75
(FA-A-0060)
(3) Precautions for replacing A/QnA (large type) series -
CPU with Universal model QCPU
(FA-A-0068)

Technical bulletins (2) and (3) includes similar


replacement information as the transition
handbook.
5 How can I obtain replacement related For replacement related documents, please
documents? contact your local Mitsubishi sales office or -
representative.
6 Is it true that the A/QnA -> Q conversion For details on the A/QnA -> Q conversion support
support tool can be downloaded from tool, please contact your local Mitsubishi sales -
the website free of charge? office or representative.

176
MEMO

177
Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range


If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of
the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales
representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will
be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning,
maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a
designated place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6)
months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis
warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage
environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual,
user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user.
Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided
if functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is
subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in
the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused
by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the
user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production


(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions
at each FA Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability


Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by
any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user
by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not ,
compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products,
replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications


The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior
notice.

178
MEMO

179
MEMO

180
MEMO
Mitsubishi Electric Programmable Controllers
MELSEC-A/QnA Series Transition Examples

Precautions before use


This publication explains the typical features and functions of the products herein and To use the products given in this publication properly, always read the relevant manuals
does not provide restrictions and other information related to usage and module before use.
combinations. Before using the products, always read the product user manuals. The products have been manufactured as general-purpose parts for general industries,
and have not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system
Mitsubishi Electric will not be held liable for damage caused by factors found not to be
used in purposes related to human life.
the cause of Mitsubishi Electric; opportunity loss or lost profits caused by faults in
Before using the products for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power,
Mitsubishi Electric products; damage, secondary damage, or accident compensation, aerospace, medicine or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi.
whether foreseeable or not, caused by special factors; damage to products other than The products have been manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
Mitsubishi Electric products; and to other duties. installing the products where major accidents or losses could occur if the products fail,
install appropriate backup or fail-safe functions in the system.

Country/Region Sales office Tel/Fax


USA Mitsubishi Electric Automation lnc. Tel : +1-847-478-2100
500 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon Hills, IL 60061, USA Fax : +1-847-478-2253
Brazil MELCO-TEC Representacao Comercial e Assessoria Tecnica Ltda. Tel : +55-11-4689-3000
Rua Jussara, 1750 - Bloco B- Sala 01 Jardim Santa Cecília- CEP 06465-070, Fax : +55-11-4689-3016
Barueri, São Paulo, Brazil
Germany Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch Tel : +49-2102-486-0
Gothaer Strasse 8, D-40880 Ratingen, Germany Fax : +49-2102-486-1120
UK Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. UK Branch Tel : +44-1707-28-8780
Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Hertfordshire, AL10 8XB, UK. Fax : +44-1707-27-8695
Italy Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italian Branch Tel : +39-039-60531
Viale Colleoni 7-20864 Agrate Brianza (Milano), Italy Fax : +39-039-6053-312
Spain Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Spanish Branch Tel : +34-93-565-3131
Carretera de Rubi 76-80.AC.420, E-08190 Sant Cugat del Valles (Barcelona), Spain Fax : +34-93-589-1579
France Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. French Branch Tel : +33-1-5568-5568
25, Boulevard des Bouvets, F-92741 Nanterre Cedex, France Fax : +33-1-5568-5757
Czech Republic Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Czech Branch Tel : +420-251-551-470
Avenir Business Park, Radicka 751/113e, 158 00 Praha5, Czech Republic Fax : +420-251-551-471
Poland Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Polish Branch Tel : +48-12-630-47-00
32-083 Balice ul. Krakowska 50, Poland Fax : +48-12-630-47-01
Russia Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Russian Branch St.Petersburg office Tel : +7-812-633-3497
Piskarevsky pr. 2, bld 2, lit "Sch", BC "Benua", office 720; 195027, Fax : +7-812-633-3499
St. Petersburg, Russia
South Africa CBI-Electric. Tel : +27-11-977-0770
Private Bag 2016, ZA-1600 Isando, South Africa Fax : +27-11-977-0761
China Mitsubishi Electric Automaiton (China) Ltd. Tel : +86-21-2322-3030
10F, Mitsubishi Electric Automation Center, Fax : +86-21-2322-3000
No.1386 Hongqiao Road, Changning District, Shanghai, China
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd. Tel : +886-2-2299-2499
6F., No.105, Wugong 3rd Road, Wugu District, New Taipei City 24889, Taiwan, R.O.C. Fax : +886-2-2299-2509
Korea Mitsubishi Electric Automation Korea Co., Ltd. Tel : +82-2-3660-9530
3F, 1480-6, Gayang-Dong, Gangseo-Gu, Seoul, 157-200, Korea Fax : +82-2-3664-8372
Singapore Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte, Ltd. Industrial Division Tel : +65-6470-2308
307, Alexandra Road, Mitsubishi Electric Building, Singapore, 159943 Fax : +65-6476-7439
Thailand Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Thailand) Co., Ltd. Tel : +66-2906-3238
Bang-Chan Industrial Estate No.111 Soi Serithai 54, Fax : +66-2906-3239
T.Kannayao, A.Kannayao, Bangkok 10230 Thailand
Indonesia P.T. Autoteknindo Sumber Makmur Tel : +62-21-663-0833
Muara Karang Selatan, Block A/Utara No.1 Kav. Fax : +62-21-663-0832
No.11, Kawasan Industri Pergudangan, Jakarta-Utara 14440, P.O, Box 5045, Indonesia
India Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd. Tel : +91-20-2710-2000
Emerald House, EL-3, J Block, M.I.D.C., Bhosari, Pune, 411026, Fax : +91-20-2710-2100
Maharastra State, India
Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty.Ltd. Tel : +61-2-9684-7777
348 Victoria Road PO BOX11, Rydalmere, N.S.W 2116, Australia Fax : +61-2-9684-7245

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS: 1-14, YADA-MINAMI 5, HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA, JAPAN

New publication, effective Sep. 2012.


L(NA)08121E-C 1209(MDOC) Specifications are subject to change without notice.

You might also like